JP7417033B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The invention described in this specification (hereinafter referred to as the "present invention") relates to gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines.

A slot machine (player type game machine), which is a typical gaming machine, generally controls the progress of the game using reels (also called "player") (for example, reel drive control, role determination ("player"), etc.). The main control board (also referred to as "Raffle Lottery"), the control of the input and payout of game media such as game medals, the control of the transition of gaming states between multiple gaming states with different winning winning probabilities, etc. (also referred to as "main control means"), and various effects (image effects using an image display device (also referred to as a "liquid crystal display device"), audio effects using a speaker device, etc.) aimed at increasing the interest of the game depending on the gaming situation. A sub-control board (also referred to as "sub-control means") that performs control related to the execution of It is now possible.

In addition, in slot machines, generally, an active line is set by inserting a specified number of gaming media, and the player performs an operation to start reel rotation, such as tilting a start lever (also referred to as a "starting lever"). Accordingly, a winning role determination process (also referred to as a ``winning lottery process'' or ``internal lottery'') is performed, and one of the game winning roles (also simply referred to as a ``winning role'') or a loss is determined, and then the plurality of reels start rotating. . When multiple reels start rotating and reach a predetermined rotation speed, an operation to stop the reel rotation, such as pressing a stop switch, is enabled, and the player can stop the reel rotation for each reel individually. The rotation is stopped sequentially.

Normally, the rotation of the plurality of reels is controlled based on the timing of the reel rotation stop operation by the player and the determined combination. In other words, each reel is controlled so that it can be stopped at any timing within a predetermined period of time (normally, a maximum of 5 symbols can be moved) from the timing when the reel rotation stop operation is performed. The winning combination determined (also referred to as "selected" or "winning") by the processing (also referred to as the "permitted winning combination") is completed as much as possible (the combination of symbols that constitute the permitted winning combination (also referred to as "corresponding symbols") is stopped and displayed on the active line), and any winning combination that has not been determined by the winning combination determination process is not formed (corresponding symbols constituting a winning combination other than the combination that is allowed to be formed are not stopped and displayed on the activated line). Note that the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is also referred to as a "roll".

Furthermore, as game winnings, in addition to normal winnings called replay winnings and small winnings, special winnings also called bonus winnings are provided. A re-gaming role means that even if the winning combination is successful, no gaming media (gaming value) will be awarded (cannot be acquired), but it will be possible for the player to play the next game (play the next game without having to insert new gaming media). It is also called a ``replay role.'' A small winning combination is a winning combination that makes it possible to win a predetermined number of game media when it is established, and is also called a "winning combination." A bonus role (special role) is a role in which a special game state (also referred to as a “special role,” “special game,” or “bonus game (game)”) can be activated (settable) upon its establishment. It is. The special gaming state is, for example, the winning probability of a predetermined small winning (it can be simply "decision probability"), the "practical lottery probability" (or simply "lotting probability"), the "winning prize selection probability" (simply "decision probability"), Refers to a gaming state in which the winning probability (also referred to as "selection probability") or "winning probability" (or simply "winning probability") is higher than normal.

The symbols that constitute the symbol combinations that make up the special winning combination are often arranged in small numbers on each reel. For this reason, even if a special combination is determined, the player must perform a reel rotation stop operation on each reel while determining the rotating and displaying symbols and timing the corresponding symbols to stop and display. If you cannot perform the operation (also known as "eyeballing"), it will be difficult to achieve a special winning combination. However, if a special role has been determined but it cannot be realized, the information indicating that the special role has been determined will be carried over to the next game ("Special role"). Even players who are not good at eye-catching are guaranteed the opportunity to win a determined special role. There are some special roles that cannot be overcome).

In addition, in conventional slot machines, multiple RT states (gaming states) are provided in which the probability of winning a replay winning combination differs. , when a symbol corresponding to a special prize is displayed, when a game related to a special prize is finished, when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed), and the system generally shifts to another RT state. Are known. Such a transition between RT states is controlled by the main control board because it involves a change in the probability of determining a winning combination (replayed winning combination). Furthermore, the period in which the probability of winning a replay winning combination is controlled to be in the RT state where it is set to be the highest is sometimes referred to as replay time.

On the other hand, a game period called AT (assist time) is set in which information that allows players to play games advantageously is set, and a predetermined notification performance (assist performance) is performed within this game period. ing. Such an AT may be set during a period (replay time) in which the probability of winning a replay winning combination is controlled to the highest RT state (replay time), and the AT during such a replay time is This is generally referred to as ART (Assisted Replay Time). In reality, ART (assist Sometimes called replay time. As an assist performance performed during AT, for example, when a small role that allows the acquisition of game media is determined, it is announced, or the determined small role is established (the corresponding symbol is moved to the active line). The operation mode of the stop switch (operation order (also referred to as "press order") indicating the order in which multiple stop switches should be operated) and the stop switch operation mode required for displaying the stop switch at the top There are known devices that notify the operating position (also referred to as "push position") indicating the rotational position of the reel at which the operation should be performed. Note that game combinations (rotation determination results) in which the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed differ depending on the pressing order are also referred to as "pressing sequence combinations." Furthermore, a game in which an assist performance is performed during AT is also referred to as an "assist game."

There is also a slot machine (also referred to as a "sub-AT machine") in which the above-mentioned AT-related control processing (also referred to as "AT-related control processing") is performed exclusively by a sub-control means. However, due to problems such as being able to forcibly set AT by performing fraudulent acts (goto acts) against the secondary control means, recently it has become more difficult to commit fraudulent acts than with the secondary control means. There are many slot machines (also referred to as "main AT machines") in which a main control means performs part of the AT-related control processing. For example, the main control means exclusively performs the processing related to AT settings and the processing for determining the press order to be notified during AT, and the sub-control means mainly performs the processing determined by the main control means during AT set by the main control means. A main AT machine is known that performs processing such as notifying the order of presses (assist performance). In such a main AT machine, various information regarding the AT is managed by the main control means, and this information is appropriately transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means.

In general, in slot machines, the gaming parlor side processes the role determination results ("rotation lottery results" (can also be simply "lottery results"), "role selection results" (simply "selection results"), and "role winning results". ” (which may also be simply referred to as “winning result”)) can be changed within a range of multiple levels. Differences in winning winning probabilities (also referred to as "setting differences") affect the ball payout rate of slot machines, so the setting value serves as an index for managing the ball payout rate for game parlors, and as an indicator for players to use. There is a lot of interest in this as an indicator for acquiring more game media. Among the role determination results (winning combinations), there are those in which the probability of determining a role does not change regardless of the setting values (also referred to as ``role determination results with no setting difference''), and those in which the probability of determining a role changes depending on the setting difference ( (also referred to as ``rot determination results with different settings'').

A slot machine has an advantageous section in which assist games can be executed and a normal section in which assist games cannot be executed, and when a predetermined number of games are played in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends and the machine returns to the normal section. Those configured to migrate are known. In addition, when a predetermined condition (also referred to as an "ending condition") is met during an advantageous section, an ending effect will be executed to notify that the advantageous section has ended, and AT will not be extended (additional). A slot machine with this configuration is also known (for example, see Patent Document 1 below). On the other hand, there is also known a slot machine that makes a top-up by referring to a dedicated top-up table when an ending condition is met (see, for example, Patent Document 2 below).

In slot machines, it is also common practice to display the payout (number of game values awarded, etc.) when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. For example, some symbol combinations are written in a simplified manner along with their payouts on a panel member provided on the front door of a slot machine, and all symbol combinations that can yield payouts are displayed together with their payouts on the image display screen. There are also known slot machines configured to do so (for example, see Patent Document 3 below).

In addition, when a special combination is selected in which the corresponding symbols cannot be aligned on the active line unless the player presses the corresponding symbols at a predetermined timing, if the player is unable to align the corresponding symbols, the player will receive an advantageous bonus. A slot machine configured to shift to a gaming state is also known (for example, see Patent Document 4 below).

In addition, when a game is played in an abnormal state different from normal, a specific display device (for example, a bet button lamp) is configured to light up in a lighting color different from normal to notify that the abnormal state is present. Slot machines are also known (for example, see Patent Document 5 below).

Furthermore, there are many gaming machines that perform display effects using image display devices. As such display effects, effects that display text information like subtitles in a movie (also referred to as "subtitle effects") are known. A gaming machine is known that is configured to set a counter to a predetermined value when the subtitle display starts, subtract the counter at predetermined time intervals, and hide the subtitle display when the counter value reaches 0. (For example, see Patent Document 6 below).

As display effects, effects that switch scenes depending on the progress of the game (also referred to as "scene switching effects") are also known. When performing a scene switching effect, if a switching instruction is received after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed from the start of display of a certain scene, it will immediately switch to another scene, but if a switching instruction is received before the predetermined amount of time has elapsed, A gaming machine is known that is configured to switch to another scene after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, see Patent Document 7 below).

As a display effect, an effect (also referred to as a "continuous effect") in which moving images with a story are displayed over a plurality of games is also known. When executing a continuous performance, when the final scene of the continuous performance shows a game result that is unfavorable to the player, the display screen of the continuous performance becomes dark and visibility is reduced (“blackout effect”) There is a known gaming machine that is configured to perform a game (also referred to as a game machine) (see, for example, Patent Document 8 below).

JP 2018-796 Publication JP 2018-126213 Publication Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-135540 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-126497 JP 2015-8873 Publication Patent No. 5765060 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-249024 JP 2018-43014 Publication

In conventional gaming machines, various improvements have been made in order to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game, and to make the game smoother, but there is still room for further improvement.

For example, as mentioned above, if a special combination is selected in which the corresponding symbols cannot be aligned on the active line unless the player presses the corresponding symbols at a predetermined timing, and the player is unable to align the corresponding symbols, it is difficult for the player to It is also practiced to shift the game to an advantageous gaming state. However, in the conventional system, when a special role is selected, a notification indicating that the special role has been selected is made, so it is easy for the player to understand that the special role has been selected, and the player can relatively easily select the special role. You will be able to match the corresponding patterns. Therefore, the transition to an advantageous gaming state may not be possible or may be delayed.

In addition, for the symbol combinations displayed on the panel member of the front door or the image display screen, only one type of benefit is given to the player (for example, when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line). (adding value). For this reason, it is of little interest to players.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, the trigger for ending the advantageous period (for example, playing 1,500 games during the advantageous period and acquiring a gaming value of 2,400 or more coins) is uniform. Moreover, since the gaming state controlled by the main control means and the performance executed by the sub-control means correspond uniformly, it is easy for the player to know when the end of the advantageous section approaches. If the player becomes aware of this, the player's desire to play may decrease.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, the performances and the like that are executed after the end of the advantageous section are uniform. Therefore, even if a player can obtain a large amount of gaming value during an advantageous period, many players stop playing when the advantageous period ends.

Furthermore, recent gaming machines need to notify players of a large amount of information depending on the progress of the game. Therefore, some gaming machines are equipped with multiple dedicated notification devices. On the other hand, in gaming machines that are equipped with large decorative parts and movable accessories, such parts take up a lot of space, so the space is limited, making it difficult to secure space for the notification device. There are also challenges.

Furthermore, with conventional gaming machines, there have been cases where the player suddenly shifts to another gaming state while staying in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player during the advantageous period. Therefore, the player may feel uncomfortable or discouraged.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines used a predetermined lighting unit to notify that an abnormal condition was present, but it was difficult to tell that the lighting was meant to notify that an abnormal condition was present, so it was not possible to provide reliable notification. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to do so.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the display start timing in subtitle effects and the scene switching timing in scene switching effects may be incorrect, which may make it difficult for players to recognize the displayed content or control the tempo of the game. There is a possibility that the situation may worsen and the interest in the game may decrease. In addition, in the blackout effect, the visibility of the entire display screen may be reduced, making it difficult for the player to check other information displayed on the display screen, reducing the interest in the game. There is a possibility.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can execute display effects that can improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has the following features. In addition, in the following description of the characteristic configuration, an example of a corresponding configuration in the embodiment described later is shown in parentheses.
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of performances composed of a plurality of scenes (hereinafter, a collection of "productions composed of a plurality of scenes" is referred to as a "predetermined production group"), and objects can be displayed in a predetermined color, a specific object can be displayed in a specific color, a specific object can be displayed in a predetermined color, and a specific object can be displayed in a specific color. It has a specific effect that suggests that the expectation level of awarding benefits differs depending on the video image. It has multiple effects that can display character strings related to the character's dialogue displayed in the display area (referred to as ``dialogue characters'') . The number of colors corresponding to the level of expectation of granting a benefit of the object is configured to be greater than the number of colors corresponding to the level of expectation of granting a benefit of dialogue characters when the expectation of granting a benefit is indicated by the color of dialogue characters. Comparing the case where a specific object is displayed in a predetermined color among the specific effects and the case where dialogue characters are displayed in a predetermined color among the plurality of effects, it is found that Among these, the system is configured so that the expectation of receiving a benefit is higher when the dialogue characters are displayed in a predetermined color, and the predetermined presentation group includes a predetermined presentation, and the predetermined presentation continues over multiple games. The scenes displayed corresponding to each performance belonging to a predetermined performance group may be switched based on the nth (n is a numerical value) stop operation, regardless of the type of reel that is stopped. The predetermined performance includes at least a first scene that is displayed based on the first stop operation in a certain game, and a second scene that is displayed based on the last stop operation in a certain game. However, the first scene displayed based on the first stop operation in a certain game is configured so that the next scene is not displayed unless another stop operation is performed, and the first scene displayed based on the first stop operation in a certain game The second scene displayed based on The proportion of productions in which the scene changes based on an operation is greater than the proportion of productions in which the scene changes based on the first stop operation among all productions belonging to the predetermined production group. has been done.

The gaming machine of the reference embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, a slot machine) that includes a start switch, a plurality of stop switches, and an image display section, and the image display section includes a first display (for example, The first display is a display that can be identified as text, and the first display includes a predetermined first display (for example, the first subtitle display JD1) and a specific display. (for example, a second subtitle effect display JD2), and the first display is displayed on the image display section at a time when the operation of the start switch is accepted (hereinafter referred to as a first display). , referred to as the first trigger) and a trigger due to acceptance of the final stop operation among the stop operations of the plurality of stop switches (hereinafter referred to as the second trigger). When comparing the case where the first display is displayed and the case where the first display is displayed at the second trigger, the case where the first display is displayed at the second trigger is better than the case where the first display is displayed at the second trigger. The first display is displayed at a relatively higher rate than when the first display is displayed in response to the above.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the display effects.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of the slot machine. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement of the reel of the above-mentioned slot machine. It is a diagram showing symbol combination 1 in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing symbol combination 2 in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing symbol combination 3 in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing symbol combination 4 in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) shows a bonus condition device, and (B) shows a winning replay condition device (1). It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (2) in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (3) in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (4) in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (5) in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (6) in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing winning numbers assigned to each condition device in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram conceptually showing the functions of the slot machine. It is a diagram showing the relationship between each RT state in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing the relationship between each game mode in the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing variables used in controlling the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is an advantageous section transition lottery, (B) is a chance mode 1 lottery, (C) is a chance mode 2 lottery - 1, (D) is a chance mode 2 lottery - 2, and (E) is a chance game. It is a figure which shows the content of 3 drawings, respectively. In the above slot machine, (A) is chance game number lottery, (B) is chance cycle lottery, (C) is EX1 mode lottery, (D) is EX2 mode lottery, (E) is AT mode lottery -1, (F) (G) is a diagram showing the contents of AT Mode Lottery-2 and (G) is the content of AT Mode Lottery-3, respectively. In the above slot machines, (A) is 7 1 draw, (B) is 7 2 draw, (C) is AT mode rewrite draw, (D) is 7 loop draw, (E) is gold 7 loop draw, (F) is Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery and (G) are diagrams showing the contents of the additional mode lottery. In the slot machine, (A) shows the contents of the bell number switching drawing, (B) shows the seven stock 1 drawing, (C) shows the seven stock 2 drawing, and (D) shows the contents of the performance lever weight drawing. In the above slot machine, (A) is an AT cycle drawing-1, (B) is an AT cycle drawing-2, (C) is a pullback 1 draw-1, and (D) is a drawing showing the contents of a pullback 1 draw-2. be. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the contents of the pullback 1 draw -3, (B) the pullback 2 draw, and (C) the AT cycle preferential game number draw. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the Seven Table 1 lottery, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the Seven Table 2 lottery in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the contents of the 1-bell drawing - 1, (B) shows the 1-bell drawing - 2, (C) shows the 2-bell drawing, and (D) shows the contents of the 3-bell drawing. be. In the slot machine, (A) shows the correspondence between the bonus condition device and the performance group A number, and (B) shows the correspondence between the winning replay condition device and the performance group B number. It is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between performance group numbers and condition device group numbers in the slot machine. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of symbol combination display 1, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of symbol combination display 2 in the slot machine. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the suggestion pattern 1, (B) is the suggestion pattern 2, (C) is the suggestion pattern 3, and (D) is the content of the suggestion pattern 4 in the slot machine. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the ending performance 1, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the ending performance 2 in the slot machine. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the ending performance 3, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the ending performance 4 in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a drawing for ending effect 1, (B) is a drawing for ending effect 2, (C) is a drawing for ending effect 3, and (D) is a drawing for ending effect 4. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of a setting change process, (B) is a game progress control process, and (C) is a game start waiting process in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of internal lottery processing and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of group number set processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of section type number management lever processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the above-mentioned section type number management lever processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of advantageous section transition processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of chance game number lottery processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when AT is won in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the seven number correction process, (B) is the correction counter process, and (C) is the arrival flag process in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing at the time of AT entry in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop CU rank set process, (B) is the seven loop lottery process, and (C) is the gold seven loop lottery correction process in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of bell number counter correction processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of wait processing at lever in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 1 lever processing, (B) is chance mode number determination processing, and (C) is main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing in the above slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing after AT winning in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 3 lever process, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of the money seven loop rewriting lottery correction process in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 4 lever process and (B) is the flow of the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of standby performance processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of section type number management game termination processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of cumulative counter processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 0 complete stop processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of the end processing after AT entry in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the above-mentioned AT entry end processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of main gaming state number 1 full stop processing, and (B) shows the flow of main gaming state numbers 2 and 5 full stop processing in the slot machine. This is a flowchart showing the flow of main gaming state number 3 complete stop processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main game state number 3 full stop processing described above. It is a flowchart showing another continuation of the main game state number 3 full stop process. It is a flowchart showing the flow of main gaming state number 4 complete stop processing in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of main gaming state number 6 full stop processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of main gaming state number 7 full stop processing in the slot machine. This is a flowchart showing the flow of advantageous section clear counter management processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing in the slot machine. It is a front view of the stop switch unit based on 2nd Embodiment. 3 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp of the stop switch unit in normal state 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in normal state 2. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in abnormal state 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in abnormal state 2. FIG. The AT notification display according to the third embodiment is shown, in which (A) is a front view of the AT notification display, (B) is a diagram showing the arrangement of segment LEDs in the 7-segment display, and (C) is the 7-segment display. It is a figure showing the lighting mode of a device. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation contents of the AT notification display according to the progress of the game. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content according to the progress status of the game of the said AT notification display. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents according to the timing of power-off and power-off recovery of the AT notification display. It is a transition diagram of the game state in 4th embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the charge suggestion mode lottery, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the AT lottery. In the fourth embodiment, (A) is a charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 1), (B) is a charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 2), and (C) is a charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 2). FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of charge suggestion mode=3). It is a diagram showing an example of transition from the AT gaming state to the ending gaming state in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the flow of game progress control processing in a fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of each gaming state lever process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of AT number counter update processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state 5 lever processing in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of advantageous section flag management complete stop processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state 5 complete stop processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of limit judgment processing in a 4th embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a first conversation effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a second conversation effect display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram illustrating another aspect of the range image in the dialogue display of the conversation production display, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which the dialogue display of the conversation production display is displayed in an overlapping manner. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram illustrating another mode in which dialogue display of the conversation production display is displayed in an overlapping manner, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which an error notification display is displayed in superimposition on the conversation production display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) shows a mode in which a conversation effect display is displayed while a push navigation effect display is displayed, and (B) shows another mode when a conversation effect display is displayed while a push navigation effect display is displayed. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a first subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a second subtitle effect display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing another aspect of the first subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing another aspect of the second subtitle effect display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a mode in which a background frame is attached to the characters of the second subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which an error notification display is displayed together with the second subtitle effect display. . In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a mode in which a subtitle effect display is displayed while a push navigation effect display is being displayed, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which characters in the subtitle effect display are displayed as if they are garbled. be. It is a figure which shows the expectation effect display in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the display when performing the GET performance in the fifth embodiment in the order of (A) to (F). It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the timings of the third stop operation, push navigation effect display, game value provision, GET effect sound, GET effect display, and subtitle effect display when executing the GET effect in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a first scene switching effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a second scene switching effect. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the display state of the image display section immediately before the dark change effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing the display state of the image display section when the dark change effect is executed.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the above drawings.
In addition, in the following explanation, "winning combination processing" refers to winning combinations from among a plurality of preset winning combination result numbers (consisting of one or more game winning combinations or losses (excluding when no losses are set)). , refers to a selection act such as a lottery (also referred to as "role determination") that is performed using electronic equipment, etc. to randomly select one or more role determination result numbers (winning items) . Here, the role determination result number refers to one or more gaming roles that are allowed to be realized in the game for which the role determination result number has been determined (selected) (also referred to as a "permitted role" or "winning role"). (named) or loss. Note that the determination of the winning role is also referred to as an "internal lottery" or a "winning lottery", and the "selection" in a lottery or winning is also referred to as a "lottery" or "sen".

In addition, when describing "a gaming combination is established," "a gaming combination is established," etc., "established" means a gaming combination corresponding to the determined winning combination result number (a gaming combination with a payout of gaming medals). The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) constituting a game role (regardless of whether it is a small role) or a game role that does not pay out (replay role or special role) are stopped in a predetermined manner (for example, a manner in which they are lined up on the active line described below) It is used as a concept to indicate that it is displayed in . However, regarding the timing of establishment, for example, when the reel stop operation is performed at a timing that allows the symbols corresponding to a gaming combination to be stopped and displayed on the active line, or when the corresponding symbols of a gaming combination stop on the active line. It can be set at an appropriate timing, such as the time when the symbol is displayed, the time when the slot machine identifies that the symbol corresponding to the game winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, or the time when the identified result is stored in the storage area. .

In addition, in the following explanation, the operation of inserting (maintaining) game medals into the medal slot 21 (described later) by the player, and the regulations necessary for playing games among the credited (accumulated) game medals will be explained. The operation of pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to provide a number of game medals for a game is collectively referred to as a bet operation. In addition to this bet operation, the player presses a settlement switch 24 (described later), tilts a start lever (also referred to as a "start switch") 25, and stops switches (also referred to as a "stop button") 26a, 26b, 26c. The pressing operations are collectively referred to as gaming operations. Generally speaking, "insertion" in a slot machine is used to mean "putting game medals into the slot machine" and when it is used to mean "putting game medals into the slot machine". There is. In the following explanation, the word "investment" will basically be used in the former sense, and the word "bet" will be used in the latter sense.

Further, the "number of paid out game medals" (also referred to as "number of paid out coins") of game medals means the number of game medals given to a player in one game. Furthermore, the act of paying out game medals includes the act of actually paying out game medals from the slot machine to the outside (also referred to as "actual payout"), and the act of electromagnetically paying out game medals as game medals stored in the slot machine. There is an act of increasing the stored numerical value (also referred to as "storage addition payout").

In addition, the "number of acquired game medals" (also referred to as the "number of acquired medals") refers to the number of game medals acquired by the player during a predetermined period (which can be set arbitrarily, but for example, an AT period or a bonus period). means a numerical value that is counted as the total number of In addition, the "difference number" (also referred to as the "difference number") of game medals is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game medals bet from the total number of game medals paid out during a predetermined period (a negative value). (sometimes). Although the "acquired number" and "difference number" of game medals can be used as different concepts, they will be treated as having the same meaning below.

Furthermore, "freeze" refers to a delay in execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of the game for a certain period of time. Freezes include freezes that are set when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted (also referred to as "freeze when reel rotation starts"), and freezes that are set after all reels have stopped rotating ("freeze when reel rotation stops"). ) may be provided as appropriate. During the freeze period, game operations by the player cannot be effectively accepted. Additionally, during the freeze period, a spinning drum performance (also referred to as a "reel performance") may be performed. The rotating performance is a performance that rotates the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, which will be described later, to stop and display an arbitrary symbol combination, regardless of the game operation by the player.

In the following explanation, "push navigation" refers to a process (action) of notifying the push order and push position in order to assist in the establishment of the game winning combination selected by winning combination determination. Of the push navigations, those that assist in establishing re-gaming roles are "RP navigation" (RP stands for replay), those that assist in establishing winning roles (small roles) are "prize navigation", and those that assist in establishing winning roles (small roles) are "prize navigation". Something that assists with the stop display is also called "eye navigation" (mainly performed on the sub-control means side). In addition, when you want to distinguish between push navigation performed on the main control means side and push navigation performed on the sub control means side, the former is called "main side push navigation" ("main side RP navigation", "main side winning navigation"). , "Main side push navigation"), and the latter is also called "sub side push navigation" ("Sub side RP navigation", "Sub side winning navigation", "Sub side push navigation"), "Oshi navigation" It is also called ``Production'' (``RP Navi Production'', ``Winning Navi Production'', ``Pushing Navi Production'').

Furthermore, in the following description and drawings, numerical values may be expressed in binary or hexadecimal numbers in addition to decimal numbers. Therefore, in order to distinguish between these, "B" is added to the end of the numerical value when expressed in binary, and "H" is appended to the end of the numerical value when expressed in hexadecimal. Also, when writing in decimal numbers, nothing special should be added at the end of the number.

《First embodiment》
FIG. 1 shows a slot machine (referred to as "slot machine 1") as a first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention, and the basic configuration of this slot machine 1 will be explained below in FIGS. 1 to 14. This will be explained with reference to.
<Appearance of slot machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 includes a front door 2 that is attached to the front of the main body housing so as to be openable and closable.The front of the front door 2 includes, in order from the top, an upper panel assembly 10, A middle panel assembly 20, a bottom panel assembly 30, and a saucer assembly 40 are attached.

In the center of the upper panel assembly 10, a display screen 11a of an image display device (also referred to as a "liquid crystal display device") 11 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side thereof is arranged so as to face the front. A first effect lamp 12, second effect lamps 13a, 13b, and third effect lamps 14a, 14b are arranged around the area. Furthermore, a pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are arranged below the display screen 11a on the left and right sides.

A display window W is provided in the center of the middle panel assembly 20, from which the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c arranged side by side inside the main body housing are visible. , a medal slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, and a game with the maximum allowable number of bets (for example, 3 medals). MAX-BET switch 23 for betting medals at once, settlement switch 24 for paying out betted game medals and/or credited game medals, all reels 3a, 3b, 3c (reels are referred to as A start lever 25 is operated to start the rotation of the reel (also referred to as a "reel drum"), and three stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c (on the left side in the figure) are used to individually stop the rotation of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c. The stop switch 26a corresponds to the reel 3a, the stop switch 26b in the center corresponds to the reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c on the right side corresponds to the reel 3c), and the game medals inserted from the medal slot 21 and accumulated are A reject switch 27 and the like for returning the item are provided.

The inside of the medal slot 21 includes a receiving passage (which leads to a hopper 50, which will be described later), through which the inserted game medals pass when the game medals are effectively accepted, and a reception passage (which leads to the hopper 50, which will be described later), and a passageway through which the inserted game medals pass when the game medals are not accepted. It branches into a return path (which leads to a game medal payout port 41 described later) through which game medals pass, and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branch. This blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 to the receiving path during a period in which the inserted game medals can be effectively accepted, and during other periods, the blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 into the receiving path. The receiving passage and the return passage are configured so that one can be selectively opened and the other closed so as to guide the game medals to the return passage. In the following explanation, when the blocker 48 is in the ON state, it means that the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 are guided to the receiving path (a state where game medals can be accepted), and when the blocker 48 is in the OFF state, it means that the medals are inserted into the medal slot 21. This shows a state in which game medals inserted into the slot 21 are guided to the return path (game medals cannot be accepted).

Further, inside the medal slot 21, three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c (see FIG. 2) are provided for detecting game medals. The inserted medal sensor 28a detects that game medals have been inserted into the medal slot 21, and is located at a position upstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed on the path through which the inserted game medals flow down. It is installed in The inserted medal sensor 28b detects that the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 are led to the receiving path and are effectively received, and is located downstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed (a hopper described later). 50). The inserted medal sensor 28c detects when the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 have passed through the branching part between the receiving passage and the return passage, and detects when the gaming medals inserted into the medal slot 21 have passed through the branching part (the position where the blocker 48 is installed). It is located at a position slightly closer to the input medal sensor 28b than the input medal sensor 28b.

If both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect game medals, it means that the game medals have been inserted into the medal slot 21 and that the inserted game medals have been effectively received. On the other hand, if the inserted medal sensor 28a detects a game medal, but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect a game medal, a game medal has been inserted into the medal slot 21, but the inserted game medal has not been effectively accepted. This means that the item was returned without any damage. In addition, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c detect the passing of game medals in an order different from the predetermined order (the order of 28a, 28c, and 28b), or when some inserted medal sensors detect the passing of game medals, If it is not detected, it means that an abnormal passage such as a backward flow of game medals has occurred.

The display window W is configured so that when all three reels 3a to 3c are stopped, three symbols for each reel, nine symbols in total, are displayed for the player to see. The winning line 29 that horizontally connects the middle symbol display areas of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is a winning line that is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet, and the winning line 29 is a winning line that is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet. It is configured such that it can be determined whether a gaming combination is established or not based on the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed. The activated winning line is also referred to as an "activated line." Furthermore, symbol display areas DA1 and DA2 (areas surrounded by two-dot chain lines in the figure) are provided on the left side and above the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20. The symbol display areas DA1 and DA2 are areas for displaying symbols related to symbol combinations that are important in playing the game, and will be described in detail later.

Further, the slot machine 1 is provided with various display lamps including LED lamps and the like. In this embodiment, the display lamps include a MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, a BET number display lamp 46b, a possible bet display lamp 46c, a game start display lamp 46d, a replay display lamp 46e, a status display lamp 46f, and a number of times display lamp. 46g, a storage number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by a main control board 60 (main control means 100), which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit under a situation in which game medals can be bet, and is arranged inside the MAX-BET switch 23, and when lit, the MAX-BET switch 23 is partially or completely turned on. It is designed to illuminate the target. Other display lamps are arranged on the side or below the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The BET number display lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as "BET lamp 46b") displays the number of game medals that have been bet, and is a 1-BET display that lights up when the number of game medals that have been bet is one or more. It consists of a lamp 46bC, a 2-BET display lamp 46bB that is lit when there are two or more bets, and a MAX-BET display lamp 46bA that is lit when there are three bets. The input ready indicator lamp 46c is lit under a situation where game medals can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d is lit under a situation where a game can be started by operating the start lever 25. It is something that will be done. The replay indicator lamp 46e is turned on when a replay combination, which will be described later, is established in any game, and game medals are automatically bet by automatic bet processing, which will be described later.

The status display lamp 46f is lit when paying out stored (credited) game medals, and the number display lamp 46g indicates the number of executable push navigation operations (for example, when AT is set). The number is decremented by 1 each time the push navigation is executed, and may be increased by a lottery etc.). The stored number display lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as "CRE lamp 46h") displays the number of stored game medals in increments of 1, and the payout number display lamp 46j indicates that a small winning combination described below has been completed. The number of game medals to be paid out at a time is displayed in increments of one. The storage number display lamp 46h and the payout number display lamp 46j each have two 7-segment displays (seven segment lamps to represent numbers, a decimal point (dot)) to display upper digit numbers and lower digit numbers. It consists of one segment lamp representing

The payout number display lamp 46j is also configured to display letters (alphabet) and numbers indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. Errors set in this embodiment include HP error, HE error, H0 error, CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, C1 error, FE error, E1 error, E5 error, E6 error, E7 error, etc. There is. The HP error is an error that occurs when it is determined that game medals have accumulated at the medal payout port of the hopper 50, which will be described later, and the HE error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 50 are empty (hopper empty error). The H0 error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the game medal has abnormally passed the payout sensor. CE error is an error that occurs when the inserted medal sensor determines that game medals have accumulated (gaming medal retention error), and CP error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the inserted game medals have passed incorrectly. The C0 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the inserted medal sensor, and the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the passage of the inserted medal sensor. The FE error is an error (full error) when the auxiliary storage 85, which will be described later, is determined to be full, and the E1 error is an error (RAM error) when the contents of the storage device (RAM) are not normal when the power is turned on. Yes, the E5 error is an error (round-roll stop error) when the combination of symbols when all rounds are stopped is abnormal (corresponding symbols constituting a combination other than the permissible combination are stopped and displayed). The E6 error is an error (setting value error) when the value of the setting value (set value) described below for determining the winning probability is outside the range, and the E7 error is an error when the built-in random number used in each lottery etc. is updated. This is an error (built-in random number error) when an abnormal state is detected. Errors E1, E5, E6, and E7 (these are also collectively referred to as "E-system errors") can be canceled by changing the settings described below, and other errors can be canceled by operating the reset switch 82, which will be described later. It looks like this.

Furthermore, this payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a navigation number, which will be described later, which indicates the order of operation (press order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. The payout number display lamp 46j used to display the navigation number is also referred to as a "main push order display". The payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a set value, which will be described later, when confirming the setting and changing the setting, which will be described later. The payout number display lamp 46j used to display the set value is also referred to as a "set value display".

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a and 32b are arranged at both left and right ends of the lower panel cover 31. Note that a translucent lower panel base with a predetermined pattern and a lower panel illumination light (both not shown) are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31, and this lower panel illumination light is turned on. By doing so, the pattern on the lower panel base is illuminated from the rear side.

The tray assembly 40 has a game medal payout port 41 for paying out game medals, and a game medal storage tray 42 for storing game medals facing the game medal payout port 41. , An ashtray 43 is provided on the left side of this game medal storage tray 42. Further, on the left and right sides of the game medal payout opening 41, there are speaker ports 45a formed of a large number of small holes, facing the front surface of a pair of lower speakers 44a, 44b (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the tray assembly 40. , 45b are formed.

Furthermore, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) is provided within the main body housing for dispensing game medals that are obtained when a predetermined winning mode is achieved as a result of the game. A medal detection section 51 (see FIG. 2) is provided for detecting game medals. Further, this hopper 50 has a function of physically accommodating game medals that have been thrown in and effectively accepted. Further, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) is provided near the hopper 50 to store game medals overflowing from the hopper 50. A fullness detection section 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided for detecting whether or not the game medals are in a state where there is a possibility that the game medals will overflow.

<Reel>
Each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to rotate by driving a stepping motor 35a, 35b, 35c (see FIG. 2), respectively. In addition, each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is made of a translucent member, and a translucent reel tape on which multiple types of patterns (see Fig. 3) are displayed is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the reel. It is pasted. Also, back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c (see Fig. 2) are arranged on the inner side of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c, and by lighting these back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, a display window is opened. The area of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c facing inside W is entirely illuminated from the inner side, or a predetermined symbol combination (for example, on the active line 29, It is configured to illuminate only a part of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c so as to make the corresponding symbols of game winning combinations lined up at positions different from the active line 29 stand out.

<Basic operations for playing games>
To play a game on the slot machine 1, first place a bet by actually inserting game medals into the medal slot 21, or operate either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to enter the credit range. The winning line 29 is activated by betting a specified number of game medals within the game. In this embodiment, the specified number of game medals required to activate the winning line 29 is set to three in each of the RT states of non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3, which will be described later. However, the prescribed number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as by setting the prescribed number to a different value depending on the RT state or the like. Alternatively, a plurality of winning lines may be provided, and the number of activated winning lines may be changed depending on the number of game medals bet.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is determined (the betted game medals are used for the game), a winning role determination process to be described later is performed, and then the minimum playing time ( The minimum amount of time that must be secured from when all reels start rotating in one game until all reels start rotating in the next game (for example, 4.1
After confirming that the period of time (seconds) has elapsed, each reel 3a to 3c starts rotating, and multiple types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 3a to 3c move up and down within the display window W (usually , from top to bottom). Then, when the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes a constant rotation, each stop switch 26a to 26c is enabled (operation of the stop switch can be effectively accepted), and the player presses the stop switch 26a. The rotation of the reel 3a is stopped when the stop switch 26b is operated, and the rotation of the reel 3c is stopped when the stop switch 26c is operated.

Here, if it is determined that the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the active line 29 is a predetermined winning mode (symbols corresponding to a game role that can earn game medals), each winning mode A number of game medals corresponding to the number are paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

<Connection between control board and each device>
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control boards that control the slot machine 1 include three control boards: a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B. The main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub-control board 70). The main control related to the progress of the game (including drive control of the reels 3a to 3c, role determination processing, etc.) is performed by a control circuit provided on the main control board 60, and illumination by lamps such as back lamps 38a to 38c. Control etc. are configured to be performed by a control circuit provided on the sub-main control board 70A. Further, the display control of the effect image by the image display device 11 and the control of sound generation from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly performed by a control circuit disposed on the sub-sub control board 70B. There is. Further, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 can be performed only in one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A, and the information can be transmitted between the main control board 60 and the sub-main control board 70A. Information can be transmitted in both directions with the control board 70B.

The main control board 60 includes a main CPU 61 that performs various calculation processes related to the game, a ROM 62 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, etc., and a RAM 63 that is a storage device that can write and read information. The slot machine 1 is equipped with a RAM (also referred to as an RWM), and each drive circuit operates according to a control program stored in the ROM 62, thereby controlling the progress of games in the slot machine 1. It looks like this. Note that the ROM 62 and the RAM 63 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 includes a clock pulse generator 64 for generating clock pulses (clock signals), a frequency divider 65 for dividing the clock pulses generated by the clock pulse generator 64, and a clock pulse (or frequency-divided clock pulse). A random number generator 66 for generating random numbers for use in determining winning combinations based on the generated clock pulse) and a random number capture circuit 67 for capturing the random numbers generated by the random number generator 66 are connected. The clock pulse generator 64 is composed of two oscillators (not shown), and each oscillator outputs a mutually asynchronous clock signal. Hereinafter, the clock signal with a predetermined frequency output from one oscillator will be referred to as the internal clock, and the clock signal with a predetermined frequency (different frequency from the internal clock, but may be the same) output from the other oscillator will be referred to as the internal clock. is called an external clock. For example, the internal clock is used as an operating clock of the main CPU 61 and a clock for updating random numbers used in a predetermined lottery other than determining a winning combination, and the external clock is used as an updating clock for random numbers used in determining a winning combination. Note that the main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, random number acquisition circuit 67, interface circuit 68, etc. may be mounted on one IC chip to form a one-chip microcomputer. The main CPU 61 also transmits signals to the motor drive circuit 36a, display lamp control circuit 47, hopper drive circuit 52, and sub-control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and also sends signals to the reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b. , 37c, and is configured to receive signals from the payout detection signal circuit 53 and the storage state signal circuit 87.

The motor drive circuit 36a is a circuit for controlling the rotation and stopping of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c that rotate the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively. This is a circuit for controlling the lamp. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, and 37c are circuits that transmit detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c to the main control board 60 (the detection circuit 37a corresponds to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c). The hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit that drives the hopper 50 to pay out game medals when a small winning combination is established, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 detects that game medals have been paid out from the hopper 50. This circuit transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when detected by the medal detection unit 51. The storage status signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage status signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage 85 is full to the main control board 60 in accordance with the detection result of the full detection unit 86.

Furthermore, power is supplied to the slot machine 1 from a power supply device 80 via a main control board 60. A power switch 81 , a reset switch 82 , and a setting key type switch 83 are connected to this power supply device 80 , and the configuration is such that signals from these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68 . ing. Further, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device 80 to the slot machine 1, and the reset switch 82 is a switch that accepts operations to power on and power off the slot machine 1 from the power supply device 80. This is a switch that is operated by a game store clerk or the like when an error occurs and the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved. By operating this reset switch 82, the error occurrence information stored in the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 is cleared, and accordingly, the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 perform processing when the error is resolved. executed. Further, the setting key type switch 83 is a switch operated to confirm and change the settings of the setting values that determine the level (rank) of the winning probability, and the setting change switch 84 is used to change the setting values. This is a switch for changing in stages (six stages in this embodiment).

When the front door 2 is open (also referred to as the "door open state") and power is being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is in the ON state), the setting key type switch 83 is in the ON state. By operating it, the settings can be confirmed. Further, when the door is open and power is not supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is OFF), the setting key type switch 83 is operated to the ON state, and the power switch 81 remains in that state. By turning on the slot machine 1 (power is turned on to the slot machine 1), settings can be changed. Furthermore, each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in this state, the setting value can be updated one step at a time. Furthermore, after updating the set value, the updated set value is confirmed by tilting the start lever 25, and after the update is confirmed, the work of changing the setting is completed by operating the setting key type switch 83 to the OFF state. It is supposed to be done. The setting key type switch 83 can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a predetermined key member (setting key) into a predetermined lock member provided on the main body side and rotating it. There is. In addition, setting confirmation and setting changes cannot be performed while a game is being played (when game medals are bet (including automatic bets) or when the reels are spinning). This can only be executed when the game is on standby. In addition, when confirming the settings or changing the settings, the set value is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j using six integer values from 1 to 6 (a separate display for displaying the set value is used). (The lamp may be provided inside the housing of the slot machine 1, etc.).

Power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further supplied to the sub-sub control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A. power may be directly supplied to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit for monitoring the voltage supply state is provided on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60. (not shown) are provided respectively. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines that the power supply has been cut off when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage value, and outputs a power cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 61 and a sub-main CPU 71 to be described later. In addition, each supply voltage monitoring circuit detects when the supply voltage returns to a predetermined voltage value (a different value (e.g., a higher value) than the voltage value for determining power outage, but it may be the same value). It is determined that the power has been turned on, and a power-on detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71. Note that the voltage value when detecting power-off of the main control board 60 is set to a higher value than the voltage value when detecting power-off of the sub-main control board 70A, and The main control board 60 is configured to perform a process (power-off process) that is programmed to be executed when the power is turned off (the same may be applied to power-on).

The main CPU 61 also includes a reel stop signal circuit 91, a start lever 25, inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, and a 1-BET switch 22, which are connected to or mounted on the switch board 90. , MAX-BET switch 23 and clearing switch 24 are inputted via an interface circuit 68.

Further, a blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and is configured to control ON/OFF of this blocker 48. In the following description, a signal for controlling ON/OFF of the blocker 48 is also referred to as a "blocker signal." Furthermore, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. It has become so. The main CPU 61 determines whether the front door 2 is in a closed state (also referred to as a "door closed state") or an open state (door open state) based on a signal from a door sensor.

Although not shown, the main CPU 61 connects the data counter, hall computer, etc. via an external connection terminal board, etc. when a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT state or bonus state) is reached. It is configured to output a predetermined signal (also referred to as an "outer end signal"), and to use this outer end signal to manage the number of times a predetermined gaming state has been set and to present it to the player.

On the other hand, the sub-main control board 70A includes a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various arithmetic processing related to performance management, and a ROM 72 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, etc., and is capable of writing and reading information. A RAM 73, which is a storage device, is provided, and each drive circuit operates according to a control program stored in the ROM 72, thereby controlling the management of image effects and audio effects in the slot machine 1, and controlling the lamp effects. etc. are now being carried out. Note that the ROM 72 and the RAM 73 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied. Further, a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub-main CPU 71, and a predetermined process is executed according to the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator and frequency divider. It has become.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and to transmit signals to the lamp control circuit 18. The lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls lighting of lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c.

Further, the sub-main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub-sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74, and to receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, the signal (control signal) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A will also be referred to as a "control command", and the signal (notification signal or production signal) transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B. ) are also called "direction commands." Further, a signal (status signal) transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A is also referred to as a "status command."

The sub-sub control board 70B includes a sub-sub CPU 75 that mainly performs various arithmetic processing related to controlling image effects and audio effects, and a ROM 76 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and is capable of writing and reading information. A RAM 77, which is a storage device, is provided, and each drive circuit operates according to a control program stored in the ROM 76, thereby controlling image effects and audio effects. Note that the ROM 76 and the RAM 77 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub CPU 75 receives notification signals or presentation signals from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, transmits signals to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and also sends signals to the sub-main control board 70A. configured to send a status signal to. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 controls the type and volume of sounds generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. This is a control circuit. The image display device 11 is configured to also function as a push display (also referred to as a "sub-side push order display") that displays the operation order (press order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

<Reel symbol arrangement>
In this embodiment, the symbols displayed on each reel 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 3 (the "left reel", "middle reel", and "right reel" in FIG. 3b and 3c respectively). That is, each reel 3a to 3c has "Red Seven", "Gold Seven", "Black Bar", "Blue Bar", "Blank A", "Blank B", "Bell A", "Bell B", A predetermined number of 10 types of symbols, ``Watermelon'' and ``Replay,'' are arranged. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are also referred to as a left reel (left spinning drum), a middle reel (middle spinning drum), and a right reel (right spinning drum), respectively.

<Types of game roles>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on each reel 3a to 3c are set as shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, and these are symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) that constitute a gaming combination. There is. The gaming roles in this embodiment include two special roles (BB role; BB is an abbreviation for big bonus. Also referred to as "Type 1 BB" or "bonus role") and five re-gaming roles 1 to 5. A total of 51 winning combinations are set, including the replay winning combination and 44 winning combinations (small winning combinations) of small winning combinations 1 to 44. The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) for each game combination to be established, the number of game medals to be paid out when the game combination is established, etc. are as shown in FIGS. 4 to 7.

Even if BB combinations 1 and 2 are achieved, game medals are not paid out, and when the winnings are achieved, a predetermined bonus as a special feature (also referred to as "BB" in this embodiment) is activated, and from the next game onwards, the game medals are not paid out. The player is transferred to a special gaming state (also referred to as ``BB in operation'') that is advantageous to the player, in which a predetermined bonus game (also referred to as ``BB game'') that is executed under conditions different from that of the previous game can be started. This is a game win (bonus win) that indicates that. BB role 1 is a symbol combination whose corresponding symbols are "blue bar, blue bar, red seven", and BB role 2 is a symbol combination whose corresponding symbols are "black bar, black bar, red seven" (constituting the game winning combination). The symbol names are written in the order of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c (same below) symbol combinations. A bonus game that can be started upon the establishment of BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 has a predetermined number of coins (in this embodiment, for example, 70 coins,
The game ends when game medals (the numerical value can be changed as appropriate) are acquired (as a modification, the game may end when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) have been played). BB hands 1 and 2 may be realized in non-RT and RT1 (while inside the BB), which will be described later, but they cannot be realized in RT2 (while the BB is in operation) (in Figures 4 to 7). (“-” indicates that it does not hold).

In this embodiment, only the BB role is provided as a special role, but other special roles include RB role (RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus) and MB role (MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus. Also known as "2nd type BB") ) may also be provided. Then, when the RB combination is established, the RB game as a bonus game may be started from the next game, and when the MB combination is established, the MB game as a bonus game may be started from the next game. In this case, the RB game is set to end when, for example, a small winning combination is achieved a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 12 times) are completed, and the MB game is For example, the process may end when a predetermined number (for example, more than 200) of game medals are paid out. Also, a plurality of special roles (for example, multiple types of BB roles may be provided, or both BB roles and MB roles may be provided).

If re-gaming combinations 1 to 5 are established, no game medals are paid out, but the next game is played without reducing the number of game medals held by the player (without inserting new game medals). This is a gaming combination (replay combination) that is allowed. In addition, for replay combination 1, its corresponding symbol “Bell A/Replay/Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven” (“/” means “or”) is stopped and displayed on the active line 29. At this time, the symbols ``Replay'' are arranged so as to be lined up on a line descending to the right connecting the upper left display area, the middle display area, and the lower right display area in the display window W. For this reason, the replay combination 1 is also referred to as a "downward replay" (replay is also referred to as "RP"). For the same reason, re-gaming combinations 2 to 4 are also referred to as right-up RP, upper stage RP, and middle stage RP, respectively. In addition, when the corresponding symbol "Bell A, Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven, Bell B" is stopped and displayed on the active line 29, the replay combination 5 is displayed in the upper left row of the display window W. The design is such that the "watermelon" symbol is lined up on the upper line connecting the display area, the middle upper display area, and the upper right display area. For this reason, replay winning combination 1 is also referred to as "upper watermelon RP."

As shown in FIG. 3 (reel symbols), the symbols "Replay" on each reel of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, which constitute the replay combination 4, are arranged every 5 symbols or less on each reel. There is. As a result, if the re-gaming combination 4 is won, the corresponding symbol "Replay, Replay, Replay" can be stopped and displayed on the active line 29 (also referred to as "pulling in") regardless of the order or position of the push. This is possible (see the explanation of reel rotation stop control by the reel control means 134, which will be described later). Like this re-gaming combination 4, a combination of "100 It is also referred to as "gaming role that can be withdrawn by %". It should be noted that re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 and 5 are also 100% retractable gaming combinations, similar to re-gaming combination 4. Further, re-gaming combinations 1 to 5 may be realized in non-RT and RT1, which will be described later, but are not realized in RT2.

Minor winning combinations 1 to 44 are gaming winning combinations (winning combinations) configured such that a predetermined number of game medals are paid out when the winning combination is established. Among the small winnings 1 to 44, small winnings 1 to 36 can be achieved in non-RT, RT1, and RT2, which will be described later, while small winnings 37 to 39 can be achieved in RT2 (BB in operation). It is a role that can only be achieved. Furthermore, the small winning combinations 1 to 23 and 40 to 43 are also referred to as "one-card winnings" because the number of payouts when they are established is set to one. Similarly, the minor winnings 24 to 37 are also referred to as the "15-card winnings," and the minor winnings 38 and 39 are also referred to as the "three-card winnings." Note that the 15-card hand is also referred to as the "bell small hand."

When the corresponding symbol "Bell A/Watermelon/Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven" is stopped and displayed on the active line 29, the small role 37 is displayed on the downward-to-right line in the display window W. It is structured so that the pattern ``watermelon'' is lined up. For this reason, the small role 37 is also called the "watermelon small role." Furthermore, the small winning combination 40 is a one-card winning pattern whose corresponding symbols are "red seven, red seven, red seven." For this reason, the small winning combination 40 is also referred to as the "Red 7-1 1-card winning combination". Note that small winning combinations 1 to 7 and 24 to 37 are game winning combinations that can be drawn in 100%.

<Winning items in the winning lottery (condition device)>
The role determination process (role lottery) is performed once in one game, and one or more winning items are selected as the role determination result (lottery result). Here, the winning combination result is referred to as a condition device. The table in FIG. 8(A) shows the types of bonus condition devices selected by lottery (internal lottery) and the corresponding winning combinations. The table lists the types of winning replay condition devices selected by winning combinations, the corresponding winning combinations, etc. The contents of some condition devices will be specifically explained below.

The bonus condition devices shown in FIG. (Indicates a loss in which no device was selected.) The type 1 BB-A condition device is a condition device in which BB combination 1 is won alone, and is selected during non-RT, which will be described later. In addition, if BB combination 1 is not established even if selected, the selection is carried over to RT1, which will be described later. On the other hand, in RT2, it is neither selected nor carried over (the "-" in the figure indicates that it is neither selected nor carried over). The type 1 BB-B condition device is a condition device in which BB role 2 is won alone, and is selected during non-RT, and if BB role 2 is not achieved even if it is selected, the selection is carried over to RT1. It looks like this. Also, in RT2, it is neither selected nor carried over.

During non-RT when the 1st type BB-A condition device has been selected or during RT1 when the selection of the 1st type BB-A condition device has been carried over, the corresponding symbol of BB role 1 “Blue bar / If you can draw "Blue Bar/Red Seven" onto the active line 29, BB hand 1 is established. Similarly, during non-RT when the 1st type BB-B condition device is selected, or during RT1 when the selection of the 1st type BB-B condition device is carried over, the corresponding symbol of BB combination 2 " If you can draw "black bar, black bar, red seven" onto the active line 29, BB hand 2 is established.

The re-gaming-A to L condition devices corresponding to numbers 1 to 12 shown in FIG. 8(B) are condition devices in which the re-gaming combination is the winning combination. For example, the replay-A condition device is a condition device in which replay combinations 1 to 4 are won multiple times, and may be selected during non-RT or RT1, which will be described later, but may not be selected during RT2. It is configured so that it does not. Furthermore, when selected, re-gaming combination 4 (middle RP) is always established, regardless of the order or position of pressing, whether in non-RT or RT1. The replay-L condition device is a condition device that allows replay combinations 2 to 5 to be won repeatedly, and when it is selected during non-RT, the replay combination 5 (upper watermelon) is always won regardless of the order or position of the button. RP) is established, whereas when it is selected during RT1, the re-gaming combination 4 (middle RP) is always established regardless of the pressing order or the pressing position.

The number 0 shown in FIG. 8(B) indicates a loss in which no winning replay condition device is selected. In this embodiment, this loss is selected only during non-RT, but it may also be selected during RT1 or RT2. In addition, in the case where a loser is selected during RT1, when the loser is selected, if the push order is a predetermined push order such as a reverse push (press order in which the stop switch 26c is operated first), Depending on the pressing position, the symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" (also referred to as "Red Seven Matching Symbols") may be configured to be displayed within the display window W (for example, on the active line 29). good. This red 7 matching symbol is common to the corresponding symbol of the small winning combination 40 (red 7 matching small winning combination), but the small winning combination 2 is only realized during RT2. The red 7-matched symbol that is stopped and displayed during RT1 is a losing symbol.

The win-A1 to A12 condition devices corresponding to numbers 13 to 24 shown in FIGS. 8(B), FIG. 9, and FIG. 10, respectively, are condition devices in which the winning combination is a small winning combination. Further, although it may be selected during non-RT, which will be described later, during RT1, it is configured so that it is not selected during RT2. Furthermore, if it is selected during non-RT, a predetermined 1-card hand will always be established regardless of the pressing order or position, and if it is selected during RT1, the winning combination will differ depending on the pressing order or position. It looks like this. For example, the winning-A11 condition device shown in FIG. A small winning combination of 6, which is a winning combination of one card, is always established regardless of the number of winnings.

On the other hand, if the winning-A11 condition device is selected during RT1, when the push order is "center right left", a small winning combination 6 with 15 cards will be created with a probability of 1/1; In the case of "Left", the small winning combination 34 with 15 cards is established with a probability of 1/1, and in the case of other pressing orders ("Left center right", "Left center right", "Middle right left", "Middle right left") Each of the small winning combinations 10, 15, and 16, which are one-card winning combinations, is realized with a probability of 1/8. Note that "left", "middle", and "right" mean the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and the order in which they are arranged indicates the order in which they are operated. For example, "middle right left" indicates the order in which the stop switches are pressed in the order of 26b, 26c, and 26a. In FIGS. 9 to 12, the pressing order is shown in the order of numbers "1", "2", and "3". "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", "321" in the diagram are "left center right", "left center center", "center left right", "center right left", respectively. Corresponds to the pressing order of "middle right left" and "right middle left".

During RT1, the selection of bonus condition devices is carried over, so BB combination 1 and BB combination 2 may be established depending on the pressing order and pressing position. For example, if the winning-A11 condition device is selected in RT1 where the selection of the 1st type BB-B condition device that wins BB role 2 alone is carried over, when the press order is “center right left” and “right center In the case of "Left", the small winning combination 6 and the small winning combination 34 are sure to be formed, respectively, so the BB winning combination 2 will never be formed. On the other hand, when using other pressing orders ("left middle right", "left middle right", "center left right", "center right left"), the corresponding symbol of either small winning combination 10, 15, or 16 is drawn depending on the pressed position. If it can be drawn, BB combination 2 will not be formed, but if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn, and on the other hand, the corresponding symbols of BB combination 2 "black bar / black bar / red seven" can be drawn, then BB combination 2 will be established. holds true.

Specifically, the case where the pressing order is "left middle right" will be explained as an example. First, a case will be explained in which the first press position on the left reel is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be drawn. In this case, since reel control is performed to draw in the symbol "Red Seven" on the left reel, there remains a possibility that either the small winning combination 16 or the small winning combination 21 will be realized at that stage. Next, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "Blue Bar" can be drawn in, reel control is performed to draw the symbol "Blue Bar" on the middle reel, so at that stage the small winning combination 16 If there remains a possibility that this will occur, and finally the third right reel press position is within the range where the symbol "Blue Bar" can be retracted, reel control will be performed to retract the symbol "Blue Bar" on the right reel. Therefore, the small winning combination 16 (corresponding symbols "red seven, blue bar, blue bar") is finally achieved. On the other hand, if the pressed position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be pulled in, the reel control will be performed to pull in the symbol "Red Seven" on the middle reel, so it will be missed at that stage. (None of the winning combinations will work) is confirmed (there remains a possibility that the symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" will be displayed in the end), and finally the third right reel press position. If it is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be pulled in, reel control is performed to draw the symbol "Red Seven" on the right reel, so the final symbol combination is "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven". It will be stopped and displayed.

Next, a case will be explained in which the first push position on the left reel is within the range where the symbol "black bar" can be pulled in. In this case, since reel control is performed to draw in the symbol "black bar" on the left reel, there remains a possibility that either BB combination 2, small combination 10, or small combination 15 will be realized at that stage. Next, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "black bar" can be pulled in, reel control is performed to pull in the symbol "black bar" on the middle reel, so at that stage the BB role 2 If there remains a possibility that this will occur, and finally the third right reel press position is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be pulled in, reel control will be performed to pull in the symbol "Red Seven" on the right reel. Therefore, BB combination 2 (corresponding symbols "black bar, black bar, red seven") is finally established. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "Gold Seven" can be drawn in, reel control is performed to draw the symbol "Gold Seven" on the middle reel, so at that stage the small If there is still a possibility that a winning combination of 10 will be formed and the third press position on the right reel is within the range where the symbol "Gold Seven" can be drawn, the reel control to draw the symbol "Gold Seven" on the right reel is As a result, a small winning combination of 10 (corresponding symbols "black bar, gold seven, gold seven") is finally established.

The winning-B1 to B12 condition devices corresponding to numbers 25 to 36 shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, respectively, are condition devices that use small winning combinations as winning combinations, and may be selected during non-RT and RT1. , RT2 is configured so that it is never selected. Also, whether the winning combination is selected during non-RT or during RT1, the winning combination differs depending on the pressing order and pressing position. For example, the winning-B7 condition device shown in FIG. 11 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 4, 5, 8, 13, 18, 23, and 30 are won repeatedly, and when selected during non-RT, the pressing order is When it is "Medium Daiichi", a small hand of 30 with 15 cards is realized with a probability of 1/1, and when the push order is "Left First" or "Right First", a small hand of 5 is a one card hand. holds true with probability 1/1. Note that "first on the left" is the push order in which the stop switch 26a is operated first, "first in the middle" is in the push order in which the stop switch 26b is operated first, and "first right" is in the push order in which the stop switch 26c is operated first. Indicates the pressing order. In Figures 10 to 13, the pressing order of ``Left first'', ``Middle first'', and ``Right first'' is displayed as ``1 - -'', ``-2-'', and ``- - 3'', respectively. ing.

On the other hand, when the Winning-B7 condition device is selected during RT1, when the push order is "middle left/right", a small win 4 or a small win 5, which is a one-card role, is established with a probability of 1/1, and the push order When is "Right Left Center", a small winning combination of 15 cards, 30, is established with a probability of 1/1, and the other press orders ("Left Center Right", "Left Center Right", "Center Right Left", "Right Center Left") are executed with a probability of 1/1. ''), one of the small winning combinations 8, 13, 18, and 23 will be realized with a probability of 1/8. In addition, if the winning-B7 condition device is selected in RT1 where the selection of the type 1 BB-A condition device in which BB role 1 is won alone is carried over, when the press order is “center left” and “right left center” '', the small winning combinations 4, 5 and 30 are sure to be realized, so the BB winning combination 1 will never be realized. On the other hand, for other pressing orders ("left middle right", "left middle right", "center right left", "right middle left"), depending on the pressed position, one of the small roles 8, 13, 18, and 23 will be supported. If the symbols can be drawn, BB combination 11 will not be established, but if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn, and on the other hand, if the corresponding symbols of BB combination 1 "Blue Bar / Blue Bar / Red Seven" can be drawn, then BB role 1 is established.

The winning-C to E condition devices corresponding to numbers 37 to 39 shown in FIG. It is configured so that it cannot be selected. Also, whether it is selected during non-RT or during RT1, a small winning combination 36 of 15 cards is always established regardless of the order of pressing or the pressing position.

The winning-F to Q condition devices corresponding to numbers 40 to 51 shown in FIG. 13, respectively, are condition devices in which the winning combination is a small winning combination, and is not selected during non-RT or during RT1, but during RT2. It is configured to be selected. Among these, if the winning-F, G, L, M condition device is selected during RT2, the watermelon small role (small role 24 to 37) is always 15 pieces, regardless of the order or position of the press. is now established. Winning - I, J, K, O, P, Q condition When the device is selected during RT2, a 1-card winning combination (small winning combination 1 to 23, 40 to 44) is established depending on the pressing position. There is. When the winning-H condition device is selected during RT2, a three-card winning combination (minor winning combination 38, 39) is established depending on the pressed position. If the winning-N condition device is selected during RT2, if the pressing order is "left first" or "middle first", a one-card winning combination will be established depending on the pressing position, and if the pressing order is "right first". When it is "1", depending on the position of the press, a combination of 7 and 1 card (minor win 40) can be achieved.

<Role determination probability and setting difference>
In the winning combination determination process, the probability that each conditional device is selected (winning determination probability) can be arbitrarily set. Further, the winning combination probability can be configured to be changed according to the above-mentioned setting value set by a game store clerk or the like. In this embodiment, there is a setting value configuration in six stages from settings 1 to 6, and there is a condition device in which the winning probability is changed according to the setting value, and a condition device in which the winning winning probability remains unchanged even if the setting value changes. A condition device is provided. Hereinafter, setting the winning combination probability to be changed according to the setting value will be referred to as "setting a setting difference." It is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not to provide a setting difference for each conditional device. As an example, there is no setting difference in the condition device that is the trigger for a lottery that affects the payout rate (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game medals used for the game) in the slot machine 1, and An example of this is that a setting difference may or may not be provided for devices that do not have to be set.

FIG. 14 shows the number of winning values (total number of 65536) assigned to each condition device as an example of the winning probability in the slot machine 1. In this example, the winning numbers in each RT state of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 are shown for three setting values, setting 1, setting 3, and setting 6. According to this example, during non-RT, the probability that a type 1 BB-A condition device and a type 1 BB-B condition device will be selected are each set to be relatively high, about 7/100. Furthermore, during non-RT or during RT1, the probability that any of the machines with winning conditions -A1 to A12 will be selected is set to be approximately 7/10, which is quite high.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 15 to 33.
<Functional block>
As shown in FIG. 15, from a functional point of view, the slot machine according to the present embodiment mainly performs a bet operation for betting game medals (for example, an operation for inserting game medals into the medal slot 21). , pressing operation of the 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23), reel rotation start operation (for example, tilting operation of the start lever 25) to rotate each of the stopped reels 3a to 3c, and multiple types of symbols. Each reel rotation stop operation (for example, pressing operation of stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c) to stop the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c that variably display a bet or accumulated (credit) game medals. an operation signal output means 95 that outputs a signal (also referred to as a "gaming operation signal") corresponding to each gaming operation performed by the player, such as a settling operation for paying out a coin (for example, a pressing operation of the settling switch 24); , a main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) that performs main control related to the progress of the game, and a sub-control means 200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 70) that performs predetermined effect control according to the game situation. ).

The main control means 100 can be roughly divided into a game state management means 110 that mainly manages the game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the game progress, and a main communication control that controls communication in the main control means 100. means 150. Of these, the game state management means 110 includes a set value control means 111, an RT state control means 112, a replay operation control means 113, a bonus operation control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and a random number generation/control means 116. It is equipped with a take-in means 117.

Further, the game progress management means 130 includes an accepted medal management means 131, a role determination means 132, a performance group number determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display symbol determination means 135, a payout medal management means 136, a blocker control means 137, The main communication control means 150 includes a display lamp control means 138, a press order management means 139, and a condition device group number determination means 140. The main communication control means 150 includes a control command transmission means 151 and an outer end signal transmission means 152. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control means 100 includes hardware such as a main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, and electronic circuits arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 2, and control programs stored in the ROM 62 and the like. This is a functional representation of something configured by software.

(Each means constituting the game state management means 110)
The set value control means 111 is configured to control a numerical value (also referred to as a "management set value") for internally managing the set value of the hand determination probability (consisting of 6 stages from setting 1 to setting 6). ing. In this embodiment, consecutive integer values from 1 to 6 (the integer values from 1 to 6 correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively) are used as management setting values. The management setting value data is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, and is referred to when confirming the setting value in the role determination process, and is also used when confirming the setting or changing the setting. It is referenced when displaying the set value on the value display (payout number display lamp 46j). Further, the management setting values are changed in accordance with a setting change operation by a game store clerk. Specifically, each time the setting key type switch 83 is turned on and the setting change switch 84 is pressed in that state, the setting key type switch 83 is updated by one.

As shown in FIG. 16, the RT state control means 112 is configured to control the settings of three RT states: non-RT, RT1, and RT2. Non-RT is an RT state that is set when the RAM (RAM 63) is initialized. During this non-RT, the transition to RT1 is triggered when condition P1 is satisfied. Condition P1 is that a type 1 BB-A condition device or a type 1 BB-B condition device be selected (also referred to as "BB selection").

RT1 is the RT state (also known as "BB inside") that is set when the selection of the 1st type BB-A condition device or the 1st type BB-B condition device (winning of BB role 1 or BB role 2) is carried over. ). During this RT1, when condition P2 is satisfied, the process is shifted to RT2. Condition P2 is that BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 is established (also referred to as "BB establishment" or "BB operation").

RT2 is an RT state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is set from the next game when BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 is established, and a bonus game can be executed during this RT2. In RT2, the replay combination is not won, and it is set so that any of the winning J to Q condition devices is selected (no loss). During RT2, the transition to non-RT is triggered when condition P3 is satisfied. Condition P3 is that more than a predetermined number (70) of game medals are acquired during RT2 and the bonus game ends (also referred to as "BB operation end").

Returning to FIG. 15, the replay operation control means 113 operates in a state in which the player is permitted to play the next game without betting the game medals owned by the player, triggered by the establishment of the replay combination. (also referred to as "gaming operating state"). When the replay operating state is set, information indicating that the replay operating state is set (also referred to as a "replay operating state flag") is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (for example, the value "1" is stored). be done. The set replay operation state flag is cleared (for example, the value "0" is stored) at a predetermined time point until the replay operation state is canceled.

The bonus operation control means 114 controls the bonus operation control means 114 from the time of winning the bonus role (in the case of this embodiment, BB role 1 or BB role 2) (when the 1st type BB-A condition device or the 1st type BB-B condition device is selected).
It is configured to execute a predetermined process during the period until the end of the bonus game that is executed after the B winning combination 1 or the BB winning combination 2 is established. Specifically, when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won, information indicating that BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been won (also referred to as "Type 1 BB winning flag") is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63. Set (for example, store the value "1"). In addition, when BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 is established, information indicating that the BB operation state is in the BB operation state (also referred to as "Type 1 BB operation flag") is set (for example, a value ``1'').

Freeze control means 115 is a freeze control unit that delays execution of control processing related to the progress of the game (for example, processing for accepting bet operations, reel rotation start operations, reel rotation stop operations, etc.) for a predetermined period of time, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. is configured to set. In this embodiment, there are four types of freezes: winning weight (freeze time 2 seconds), fake weight (freeze time 5 seconds), notification weight (freeze time 2 seconds), and weight at the end of all stops (freeze time 5 seconds). It is now executable.

The game mode control means 116 is configured to control the settings of eight game modes from game mode 0 to game mode 7, as shown in FIG. The gaming mode means a gaming state (also referred to as a "main gaming state") that is controlled by the main control means and is mainly related to the setting state of AT, in addition to the RT state.

Game mode 0 is a normal (non-advantageous) game state. Game mode 0 is a mode in which the player stays in a normal section different from the advantageous section described later, and is a mode in which lottery etc. related to AT games (assist games) are not performed. During gaming mode 0, when condition Q1 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to gaming mode 1, when condition Q2 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to gaming mode 2, and when condition Q3 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to gaming mode 2. The game mode is shifted to the game mode 3, and when the condition Q4 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 6. The content of each transition condition (conditions Q1 to Q15) is shown in a simplified manner in FIG. 17, but more detailed content is shown in the flowchart described later. Note that the section type number is a number (takes a value of 0 or 1) that manages whether to stay in either a normal section or an advantageous section (described later), and section type number = 0 is a normal section, section type number =1 indicates staying in each advantageous section (see also FIG. 18). When staying in game mode 0, the section type number=0. In addition, the AT winning flag is a flag (takes a value of 0 or 1) that manages the fact that AT has been won, and AT winning flag = 0 means that AT has not been won, and AT winning flag = 1 means that AT has not been won. This indicates that AT has been won (see also FIG. 18).

Game mode 1 is mainly a game state in which the section type number is 1, but is also called a "chance" to stay when AT has not been won. In game mode 1, when condition Q5 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to game mode 0, and when condition Q8 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to game mode 3. Note that the chance game number counter included in condition Q5 is a number (takes a value of 0 to 30) that manages the number of games staying in gaming mode 1, and is set to 30 when shifting to gaming mode 1. From then on, the number is subtracted by 1 every game (see also FIG. 18). In addition, the 1st type BB winning flag included in conditions Q6 to Q8 is a flag (takes a value of 0 or 1) that manages whether or not BB has been won in the winning lottery in the game. The flag=0 indicates that the player has not won the BB in the game, and the flag=1 indicates that the player has won the BB in the game (see also FIG. 18).

Game mode 2 is a gaming state also called "AT post-win 1" that mainly stays when the section type number=1 and AT is won but BB is not won. During game mode 2, the game mode 3 is shifted to when condition Q9 is satisfied.

Game mode 3 is an AT game state that is mainly triggered by a BB win in an AT win state. During this game mode 3, the push navigation described later is executed, resulting in a very advantageous game state for the player. In game mode 3, when condition Q11 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to game mode 0, and when condition Q11 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to game mode 7. In addition, the bell number counter included in conditions Q11 and Q12 is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 134) that manages the number of times (also referred to as "bell number") that push navigation (winning navigation) can be performed in AT. Yes, and when the value of the bell number counter is 1 or more, winning navigation becomes executable (see also FIG. 18). Further, the seven number is a number for managing the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), and seven number = 1 indicates a red seven, and seven number = 2 indicates a gold seven (see also FIG. 18). The seven counter is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 26) that manages the number of red sevens in stock, and the cumulative counter is a counter that manages the number of game medals acquired (difference number) in one advantageous section ( The attainment flag is a flag (takes a value of 0 or 1) for adjusting whether the number of game medals acquired (difference number) reaches the upper limit (takes a value of 0 or 1) (see also FIG. 18). .

Game mode 6 is a game state also called "chance time interior" in which the player mainly stays inside the BB in a state where the section type number=1 and the AT is not won. During game mode 6, when condition Q10 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to game mode 1.

Game mode 7 is a game state also called "internal after AT" that mainly stays after one AT ends when the arrival flag=0. During game mode 7, when condition Q10 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to game mode 4.

Game mode 4 is a game state, also called "after AT", in which the player stays after a BB is established in game mode 7. During gaming mode 4, when condition Q7 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to gaming mode 5, when condition Q8 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to gaming mode 3, and when condition Q13 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to gaming mode 5. The game mode is shifted to game mode 0, and when the condition Q14 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to game mode 7. Note that the AT cycle counter included in conditions Q13 and Q14 is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 3) that manages the stay cycle during AT.

Game mode 5 is a game state also called "AT post-win 2" in which the player stays after winning AT in game mode 4. During game mode 5, when condition Q9 is satisfied, the game mode 3 is shifted to game mode 3.

While staying in any of gaming modes 1 to 7, a shift to gaming mode 0 is triggered when condition Q15 is satisfied. The advantageous section clear counter included in condition Q15 is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 1500) that manages the number of games continuously staying in the advantageous section. is set, and is subtracted by 1 each time a game is played in an advantageous section (see also FIG. 18). In addition, the net increase counter is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 2412) that manages the number of tickets acquired (difference number) during the advantageous section, and is set to 0 when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. It is updated according to the number (see also FIG. 18).

The above-mentioned eight game modes 0 to 7 are divided into a game mode (game mode 0) belonging to the normal section and a game mode (game mode 1 to 7) belonging to the advantageous section. The normal section is a period in which push navigation (winning navigation, RP navigation, and eye push navigation) is not performed, and information that can determine the push order (information such as condition device number and instruction number) is sent from the main control means to the sub control means. It is also a period during which no data is sent to the other party. Further, the normal section is also a period in which a lottery (for example, an advantageous section transition lottery) can be held to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section.

The advantageous section is a period during which push navigation can be performed, and is also a period during which information for determining the push order may be transmitted from the main control means side to the sub control means side. In addition, in the advantageous section, a lottery that changes the performance of the advantageous section (for example, AT mode lottery) or a process that adds to the number of AT games in the advantageous section (for example, 7 stock 1 lottery, 7 stock 2 lottery), etc. is performed. It is also a period in which you can. Furthermore, in the advantageous section, a section indicator (for example, a DP segment lamp other than the 7 segment lamp (also referred to as an "advantageous section lamp") among the payout number display lamps 46j to notify the player that the player is in the advantageous section) ) lights up.While staying in the advantageous section, you may perform the winning navigation at least once (in this case, if you have not performed the winning navigation even once, you cannot move to the normal section. ).

Further, an upper limit (1500 games) is set for the period during which a player can stay in the advantageous section continuously. Further, when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section ends, all information related to the advantageous section (for example, information such as the AT winning flag, the value of the seven stock number counter, etc.) is cleared. Note that when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section ends, it is not necessary that winning navigation has been performed even once during the stay in the advantageous section. In addition, if a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous section or a lottery to change the performance of an advantageous section is performed based on the winning combination result (condition device), the winning selection result without setting differences will be applied. In particular, the lottery for changing the performance of advantageous sections may be performed based on conditions other than the winning combination results. In this case, it may be done without referring to the set value.

In this embodiment, an advantageous section clear counter is provided to keep track of the number of games that are consecutively staying in the advantageous section, and when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, the value of this advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500". set. Each time the game is played in an advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches "0", the game is forcibly shifted to the normal section. In addition, if you move from an advantageous section to a normal section before the value of the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", the value of the advantageous section clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and from the normal section to the advantageous section again. , the value of the advantageous section clear counter is reset to "1500".

It also includes a net increase counter that counts the number of game medals acquired (difference number) during the advantageous period. This net increase counter sets its counter value to "0" at the start of the advantageous section (it may also be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous section), and thereafter changes the counter value in accordance with the result of each game. Update. When updating, if the difference in number of sheets is less than 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference in number of sheets is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as is (please do not perform such correction. good). Then, when the cumulative difference in number of sheets exceeds 2400 sheets, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. Note that the cumulative counter is functionally a counter that performs the same counting as the pure increase counter. When checking the number of game medals acquired (difference number) during control processing, there are times when the value of the cumulative counter is referred to and times when the value of the net increase counter is checked depending on the processing content.

Furthermore, a correction counter is also provided as a counter that performs counting related to the number of game medals acquired (difference number) during the advantageous period. This correction counter is calculated by adding the number of AT stocks such as red sevens and gold sevens and the value of the bell counter to the value of the net increase counter (accumulation counter), and can be obtained during one advantageous period. This is a counter (takes a value from 0 to 2101) that counts the number of game medals that are expected to be acquired (also referred to as "expected number of acquisitions" or "expected number of possible acquisitions"). Then, when the value of the correction counter (expected number of acquisitions) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), this may be used as a trigger to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section at a predetermined timing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the advantageous section ends. For example, if you decide when to end an advantageous section only by the value of the advantageous section clear counter or the value of the net increase counter, if you display those values to the player, the player can confirm the advantageous section by checking them. It is possible to easily grasp the end date of the project. However, when a correction counter is provided, even though the value of the advantageous section clear counter or net increase counter has not reached the upper limit, the advantageous section ends when the value of the correction counter reaches a predetermined value. Something happens. Therefore, it becomes difficult to know when the advantageous section ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by setting the predetermined value (2100) in the correction counter to a value smaller than the upper limit value (2400) in the net increase counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous section ends during AT. For example, if the value of the correction counter (expected number of acquisitions) exceeds a predetermined value (2100) during an AT, and if the next AT is also allowed to be executed after the end of that AT, the net increase counter will reach the upper limit during the execution of the next AT. There is a high possibility that the value (2400) will be exceeded and the advantageous section will end. If the advantageous section ends during AT, there is a risk that the player will be disappointed, but if the value of the correction counter (expected number of wins) exceeds the predetermined value (2100), the advantageous section ends. It is possible to avoid such a situation from occurring.

In the game modes 0 to 7, various lottery games are held. Since the drawings are summarized in FIGS. 19 to 25, they will be briefly explained here. The advantageous section transfer lottery shown in FIG. 19(A) is a lottery to decide whether to transfer to the advantageous section or not. Or select either loser (0). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group A number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 1 lottery shown in FIG. 19(B) is a lottery that determines the chance mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during chance (gaming mode 1)), and is based on the condition device group H number. to select one of chance mode numbers 0 to 4. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group H number is as shown in the figure.

Chance mode 2 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 19(C) is a lottery to determine the chance mode number during the BB operation in chance (gaming mode 1), and the chance mode number is determined based on the condition device group D number. Select one from 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group D number is as shown in the figure.

Chance mode 2 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 19(D) is a lottery to determine the chance mode number while the BB is not operating during chance (gaming mode 1), and based on the condition device group B number, chance mode Select one of the numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group B number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 3 lottery shown in FIG. 19(E) is a lottery to determine a new chance mode number at the end of the stay period during chance (gaming mode 1). A new chance mode number 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected based on the number (not drawn). The number of winning values corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure. Note that chance mode number 4 indicates AT winning. Each chance mode lottery shown in FIGS. 19(B) to (E) is also collectively referred to as an AT lottery.

In the chance game number lottery shown in FIG. This is a lottery to determine the number of games to be played, and based on the selected chance mode numbers 1 to 3, the number of games is 0, 10, 20, or 30. The number of winning values corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The chance cycle lottery shown in FIG. 20(B) is a lottery that determines the number of cycles when a chance mode is won. Based on the chance mode numbers 1 to 3 selected in the chance mode 1 lottery, one of the cycle numbers 0 to 4 is selected. Select. The number of winning values corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The EX1 mode lottery shown in FIG. 20(C) is a lottery to determine the additional mode number (the number that manages the stock additional state during AT) after winning the AT, and based on the condition device group F number, the additional mode number 0 is selected. -2 (actually 1 or 2). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The EX2 mode lottery shown in FIG. 20(D), like the EX1 mode lottery, is a lottery that is held while staying in game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the additional mode number after AT winning, and the condition device group F number Based on this, one of the additional mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 0 or 2) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-1 shown in FIG. This is a lottery held during the event, and one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

AT mode lottery-2 shown in FIG. 20(F), like AT mode lottery-1, determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during AT) when an AT is won, so in particular, This is a lottery held during the stay in game modes 3 to 5, and one of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

AT mode lottery-3 shown in FIG. 20(G), like AT mode lottery-1 and 2, determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during AT) when AT is won. In particular, this is a lottery held after all rotation drums have stopped (also referred to as "after all stops"), and one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 1 lottery shown in FIG. 21(A) is a lottery that is held especially during the stay in game mode 1 or 4 and after all stops, in order to determine the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), and the condition device group F number Based on this, one of the seven numbers 0 to 2 is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 2 lottery shown in FIG. 21(B), like the Seven 1 lottery, is a lottery held especially during the stay in game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the type of AT, and based on the condition device group F number, Select one of seven numbers 0 to 2. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode rewriting lottery shown in FIG. 21(C) is a lottery in which the AT mode number is rewritten after the AT ends. Choose one. The number of winning values corresponding to the value of each advantageous section clear counter is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Loop Lottery shown in Figure 21 (D) is a lottery to decide whether or not to continue Red Seven, and it is a lottery that determines whether or not to continue Red Seven, and it is a lottery that determines whether you win (1) or lose (1) based on the loop number (number that manages the continuation rate of Red Seven). 0). The number of winning values corresponding to each loop number is as shown in the figure.

The gold seven loop lottery shown in FIG. 21(E) is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the gold seven, and either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected. The numbers of winning values assigned to winning (1) and losing (0) are as shown in the figure.

The gold seven loop rewriting lottery shown in Figure 21 (F) is a lottery to rewrite the continuation rate of gold seven, and either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected based on the condition device group E number. do. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The additional mode lottery shown in FIG. 21(G) is a lottery to determine the additional mode number during AT, and one of the additional mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2) is selected. The number of winning values assigned to each add-on mode number is as shown in the figure.

The bell number switching lottery shown in FIG. 22(A) is a lottery for rewriting the number of bells, and either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected based on the value of the number of bells counter. The number of winning values corresponding to the value of each bell counter is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 1 drawing shown in Figure 22 (B) is a drawing to decide whether or not to add the AT stock number, and based on the condition device group C number, either a win (1) or a loss (0) is drawn. elect. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 2 lottery shown in FIG. 22(C) is a lottery to decide whether or not to add the AT stock number, just like the Seven Stock 1 lottery, and there is a winner (1) or a loser based on the condition device group E number. Select one of (0). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The production lever weight lottery shown in FIG. 22(D) is a lottery to decide whether or not to perform a fake weight as a freeze, and based on the condition device group J number, there will be either a win (1) or a loss (0). Select. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

AT cycle lottery-1 shown in FIG. 23(A) is based on the number of staying cycles during AT (BB operation required from game mode 3 to return to game mode 3 via game modes 7 and 4) at the end of AT. This is a lottery that is held especially when the AT mode number is 1 or 2 to determine the number of stay cycles (number of stays), and based on the value of the bell number counter, the number of stay cycles is either 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3). Select. The number of winning values corresponding to the value of each bell counter is as shown in the figure.

AT cycle lottery-2 shown in FIG. 23(B), like AT cycle lottery-1, is performed especially when the AT mode number is 3 or 4 in order to determine the number of stay cycles during AT at the end of AT. This is a lottery, and one of the stay cycle numbers 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) is selected based on the value of the bell counter. The number of winning values corresponding to the value of each bell counter is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 23(C) is a lottery that is held especially when the AT mode number is 1 to 3 to decide whether or not to win AT again after the AT ends. Based on the C number, either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 23(D), like the pullback 1 lottery-1, is especially performed when the AT mode number is 4 in order to decide whether or not to win the AT again after the AT ends. Based on the condition device group C number, either the winner (1) or the loser (0) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

Like Pullback 1 Lottery-1 and 2, Pullback 1 Lottery-3 shown in FIG. This is a lottery in which either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 2 lottery shown in FIG. 24(B) is a lottery to decide whether or not to win AT again after the number of stay cycles during AT reaches 0, and is based on the AT mode number to win (1) or Select one of the losers (0). The number of winning values corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle preferential game number lottery shown in FIG. 24(C) is a lottery to determine the number of games to be set in a predetermined preferential state (also referred to as the "number of preferential state games") after the end of AT, and is based on the AT mode number. Select one of 0, 10, 20, and 30 preferential state games. The number of winning values corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 1 lottery shown in Figure 25 (A) is a lottery to determine the Seven Table number (the number that manages the table that determines the continuation rate in Red Seven), and the Seven Table Number 0 to 15 is determined based on the AT mode number. Choose one. The number of winning values corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 1 lottery shown in FIG. 25(B) is a lottery to determine the Seven Table number, similar to the Seven Table 1 lottery, and one of the Seven Table numbers 0 to 15 is selected based on the condition device group G number. . The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group G number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 1 Lottery-1 shown in FIG. The number of bells from 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 is selected based on the number that controls ease of play. The number of winning values corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

Bell Number 1 Lottery-2 shown in FIG. 26(B), like Bell Number 1 Lottery-1, is a first lottery particularly held when the game mode is 4 or 5 to determine the number of bells. , the number of bells from 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 is selected based on the CU rank number. The number of winning values corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The number of bells 2 lottery shown in FIG. 26(C) is a lottery for the second and subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and the number of bells is 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, 20 based on the CU rank number. Choose one. The number of winning values corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The 3-bell lottery shown in FIG. 26(D) is the same as the 2-bell lottery, and is a lottery for the second and subsequent times to determine the number of bells. Choose one. The number of winning values assigned to each number of bells is as shown in the figure.

Returning to FIG. 15, the random number generation/capturing means 117 is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61, clock pulse generator 64, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, and random number capturing circuit 67, and generates random numbers used in various lottery games. Generate and capture. In this embodiment, four (4ch: ch is an abbreviation for "channel") 16-bit random number means that can generate a random number sequence with a numerical range of up to "0 to 65535" and a maximum of "0 to 255" are used. It has four (4ch) 8-bit random number means capable of generating a random number sequence in a numerical range up to 1000 Hz, and each can independently generate a random number sequence. The random numbers generated by these 16-bit random number means or 8-bit random number means are also called hardware random numbers because they are updated based on the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator 64. Although not shown in the drawings, this embodiment includes a random number generation means separate from the random number generation/intake means 118. This random number generation means is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61 and RAM 63, and has random number means capable of generating a random number sequence within a predetermined numerical range as a random number used for determining a winning combination. Since this random number is updated based on a program, it is also called a software random number (soft random number).

(Each means constituting the game progress management means 130)
The received medal management means 131 stores game medals that are actually accepted (also referred to as "inserted game medals") inserted from the medal slot 21 (those that are guided into the receiving path and detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b). The system is configured to control whether game medals (also referred to as "accepted game medals") are game medals that are bet directly or game medals that are credited. In this embodiment, if the number of bets does not reach the maximum allowable bet number (the number of bets required to execute the game (regular number "3")), the accepted game medals are directly bet. If the number of bets has reached the maximum allowable bet number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum allowable number of credits (for example, "50"), the received game medals are configured to be the game medals to be credited. ing.

In addition, the accepted medal management means 131 performs an automatic bet process (without reducing the number of game medals held by the player, in a game set to the replay operation state, the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game). The system is configured to perform a process of setting a bet state. Even in the replay operation state, if the number of credits has not reached the maximum allowable number of credits, the inserted game medals are accepted as game medals to be credited (or they may not be accepted). If the number of bets has reached the maximum allowable bet number and the number of credits has reached the maximum allowable number of credits, the inserted game medals will not be accepted and will be returned.

The winning combination determining means 132 determines a plurality of winning combinations based on a preset probability of winning a winning combination (the number of lottery entries) when the start lever 25 is operated (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted). It is configured to perform a winning combination determination process (internal lottery) for selecting at least one winning combination result from among the results (condition device). This winning combination determination process is performed using random numbers generated by the above-mentioned 16-bit random number means. Specifically, when the start lever 25 is operated, a 16-bit random number means takes in a generated random number. Then, when performing the winning combination determination process, the loaded random number is read out, a predetermined soft random number is added to the read random number, and the added random number is used to select a conditional device. A conditional device may be selected using read random numbers without adding a predetermined soft random number.

The winning combination determination process is performed with reference to a predetermined winning combination table (not shown) set in advance. The winning combination table has a structure in which lottery number data corresponding to each condition device is stored in a predetermined storage area (a plurality of addresses) in the ROM 62 for each set value. In the winning combination determination process, when one or more conditional devices are selected, the gaming combination corresponding to the selected conditional device becomes the permissible winning combination in the game. Information on the selected conditional device (winning combination) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, but if the information on the winning item stored in one game is information regarding the winning of a minor combination or a replay combination. is cleared (reset to "0") after the end of the game, regardless of whether or not these small winning combinations and replaying winning combinations are established. On the other hand, if the BB winning combination is not established even if the BB winning combination is won, the information regarding the winning of the BB winning combination is not cleared and held in memory until the BB winning combination is established.

The performance group number determining means 133 is configured to perform a process of associating a performance group number with the condition device selected by the role determination process. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the effect group A group number (0 or 1) is associated with the bonus condition device, and the effect group B group number (0 to 1) is associated with the winning replay condition device. 29). For example, as shown in FIG. 27(A), the performance group A group number 1 is commonly associated with the type 1 BB-A condition device and the type 1 BB-B condition device. In addition, as shown in FIG. 27(B), differences in the pressing order may give rise to advantages or disadvantages in the game (influence on the balls put out), or may cause differences in the number of game medals paid out (number acquired). The performance group B group number 13 is commonly associated with the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices, and the performance group B group number 14 is commonly associated with the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices.

On the other hand, there is a re-gaming-A to L condition device that corresponds to the winning of re-gaming combinations that do not affect the advantage or disadvantage in the game due to the difference in the order of pressing (does not affect the balls put out), and Winning re-gaming conditions corresponding to the winning of a small role (winning role) where there is no difference in the number of game medals paid out (number acquired) or the number of game medals that can be acquired is small (for example, less than the specified number of bets) Regarding the devices, different performance group B numbers are associated with each condition device.

Returning to FIG. 15, the reel control means 134 uses the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 has been effectively accepted) as a trigger, after confirming that the minimum playing time has elapsed. , after the reels 3a to 3c have started rotating and all the reels that have started rotating are in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c have been operated in sequence (each operation of the stop switches 26a to 26c is valid). The system is configured to sequentially stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3a to 3c in response to the receipt of the reel 3a to 3c.

The rotation stop control of each reel 3a to 3c is based on each stop table (not shown) that is set according to the winning combination result selected in the winning combination determination process, and the operation mode (pressing) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. (order, operation timing, etc.). Each reel 3a to 3c starts moving from the timing when the stop switch 26a, 26b, 26c is operated.
A to 3c are stopped within a predetermined permissible stopping time (for example, 190 milliseconds) (in this embodiment, within the maximum number of sliding frames of 5 frames).

That is, if a predetermined gaming combination is selected as a permissible winning combination as a result of the winning combination determination process, the symbols corresponding to the selected gaming combination will stop on the active line 29 as much as possible within the permissible stopping time. As shown, in the case of a loss, the reels 3a to 3c are controlled to stop so that the symbols corresponding to any of the game combinations are not stopped and displayed on the activated line 29. In addition, if a re-playing role or a small role is won while the winning of a special role is carried over, or if there is a case where a special role and a re-playing role or a small role are won at the same time, the re-gaming role, special role, or small role will be changed. Reel rotation stop control may be performed to give priority to re-gaming winnings (the priority of the small winnings may be higher than the special winnings), which is established preferentially in the order of .

The stop display symbol determining means 135 determines which symbols are stopped and displayed on the reels 3a to 3c based on the timing when the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated, and determines which symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line 29. It is configured to determine whether a gaming combination has been established based on the symbol combination determined to be the same (which may be different from the symbol combination actually stopped and displayed).

The payout medal management means 136 performs a storage addition payout function that adds the number of game medals corresponding to the established minor role when the minor role is established to the number of credits when the number of credits has not reached the maximum allowable number of credits. Therefore, when the number of credits reaches the maximum allowable number of credits, the actual payout is performed by driving the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52. In addition, the payout medal management means 136 transfers the betted number of game medals or the credited number of game medals to the hopper 50 when the settlement operation (pressing operation of the settlement switch 24) is accepted effectively. It is designed to be driven and refunded.

The blocker control means 137 outputs a blocker signal for controlling the above-mentioned blocker 48, and switches the blocker 48 between an ON state (a state in which game medals can be accepted) and an OFF state (a state in which game medals cannot be accepted). It is composed of Note that when the blocker 48 is turned off, the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 are guided to the return path and returned. However, the insertion of game medals is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 includes the various display lamps described above (MAX-BET display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, input possible display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, replay display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, number of times The display lamp 46g, the CRE lamp 46h, the payout number display lamp 46j) are controlled to turn on and off through a display lamp control circuit 47. In addition, when the payout number display lamp 46j is made to function as a main side push order indicator, the push order management means 139 controls the payout number display lamp 46j.

The push order management means 139 selects an instruction number (any one of 0 to 6) corresponding to the push order to be notified, depending on the winning combination result (condition device) selected in the winning combination processing. Instruction number 0 is selected when the pressing order is not to be reported, and instruction numbers 1 to 6 are selected when the pressing order is to be notified. In this embodiment, instruction number 1 is "left center right," instruction number 2 is "left center center," instruction number 3 is "center left right," instruction number 4 is "center right left," and instruction number 5 is "right left center." , instruction number 6 is associated with each pressing order of "right center left".

The push order management means 139 is also configured to perform push navigation (main push navigation) by causing the payout number display lamp 46j to function as a main side push order alarm and notify the selected instruction number. There is. This push navigation notifies the navigation number using two 7 segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "7 segments") provided on the payout number display lamp 46j. For example, "=" is displayed in the left 7 segments, and the numerical value of the instruction number (for example, "2" for instruction number 2) is displayed in the right 7 segments. The "=" displayed in the seven segments on the left is for distinguishing from when the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j. When navigation number 0 is selected, the payout number display lamp 46j is not displayed, but as another aspect, "=" is displayed in the left 7 segments and "0" is displayed in the right 7 segments. "0" may be displayed on both the left 7 segments and the right 7 segments, or "0" may be displayed on only one of the left and right 7 segments.

The conditional device group number determining means 140 determines the conditional device group number used for selecting the winning value in various lotteries according to the performance group A group number and the performance group B group number determined by the performance group number determination means 133. is configured to determine. Specifically, the condition device group numbers are divided into 10 types from the condition device group A number to the condition device group J number, and for each combination of the effect group A group number and the effect group B group number, the condition Each number value from the device group A number to the condition device group J number is associated in advance. The specific correspondence is as shown in FIG. 28. For example, for the combination of effect group A group number 1 and effect group B group number 0, condition device group A number 1, condition device group B number 2, condition device group C number 2, condition device group D number 0, condition device Group E number 0, condition device group F number 1, condition device group G number 0, condition device group H number 1, condition device group I number 0, and condition device group J number 1 are associated with each other. In addition, in the remarks column in the table of FIG. 28, abbreviations representing the contents of each combination of the presentation group A group number and the presentation group B group number are described.

(Each means constituting the main communication control means 150)
The control command transmitting means 151 is configured to transmit a control command including various information regarding the game at a predetermined timing. For example, the control commands sent before the start lever 25 is operated include a control command that includes information indicating which gaming mode is set (also referred to as a "gaming mode command"), and which RT state is set. There are two types of control commands: one is a control command (also called an "RT command") that includes information indicating whether or not the game is being played, and the other is a control command that includes information that indicates the operating state of replay (also referred to as an "operating state command"). Further, as control commands that are transmitted in response to the start lever 25 being operated, for example, a control command that includes instruction number information (also referred to as an "instruction number command"), a production group number (production group A number and production There is a control command (also referred to as "effect group number command") that includes information about the group B number. In addition, there are control commands that include setting value information, control commands that include information on the values of various counters such as a bell counter, control commands that include information that instructs the content of effects to be executed in the sub-control means, and bonus games that will be described later. Control commands and the like containing information to be transmitted may be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, or triggered by other triggers.

Furthermore, upon confirmation of the elapse of the minimum gaming time, the control command transmitting means 151 sends a control command (" (also referred to as "full rotation start command"). Furthermore, upon receiving the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the first reel), a control command ("First stop reception In addition to transmitting a control command (also referred to as a "first stop command") that includes information on the first reel stop, triggered by the first reel stop (stopping of the reel corresponding to the first stop operation). ). Similarly, when the second stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the second reel) is received, a control command ("second stop") containing information indicating that the second stop operation has been received is triggered. At the same time, when the second drum stop (stopping of the reel corresponding to the second stop operation) is triggered, a control command (also referred to as a "second stop command") containing information about the second drum stop is sent. (also referred to as). Similarly, upon reception of the third stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the third reel), a control command containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been received (“Third stop reception At the same time, when the third drum stop (stopping of the reels corresponding to the third stop operation) is triggered, a control command (also called a "third stop command") containing information on the third drum stop is sent. ). Furthermore, before determining the stopped symbols, a control command (also referred to as a "all stop command") that includes information on stopping all the spinning drums, and after determining the stopped symbols, a control command that includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out ("payout command"). (also referred to as "number command"). In addition, at a predetermined timing after all rotations have stopped, a control command (also referred to as a "winning combination result command") including information on the winning combination result (bonus condition device and winning replay condition device) is transmitted. Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is only possible in one direction, from the former to the latter.

The outer end signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer end signal to an external device such as a data counter or hall computer when a predetermined gaming state is reached. In this embodiment, 15 game medals are paid out twice when a win-A1 to A12 condition device or a win-B1 to B12 condition device is selected while staying in the game mode 3 of the advantageous section. When a situation occurs (continuously), an outer end signal is output. Such a situation can occur even when inside the BB or when not inside the BB (non-BB inside). If the configuration is such that the outer end signal is output only when such a situation occurs inside the BB, it will be possible to determine that the BB is inside the BB by outputting the outer end signal. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the above-mentioned situation occurs, whether inside the BB or not inside the BB, the outer end signal is output. Therefore, even if the outer end signal is output, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the signal is inside the BB or not. However, the possibility that 15 game medals will be paid out when the BB is not inside is considerably lower than when inside the BB. Therefore, when the outer end signal is output, there is a high possibility that it is output inside the BB. Therefore, even if the player checks the number of times the outer end signal has been output using an external device, etc., and determines that number to be the number of times the signal has moved inside the BB, that judgment may deviate greatly from the actual situation. (Reliability can be ensured when the outer end signal is taken as a signal indicating that it is inside the BB).

The sub-control means 200 includes a sub-main control means (also referred to as "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) lamp effects, image effects, and audio effects, and a sub-main control means (also referred to as "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly controls image effects and audio effects. (Execution) sub-sub control means (also referred to as "second sub control means") 200B.

The sub-main control means 200A is broadly divided into an effect management means 210 and a sub-main communication control means 230. The performance management means 210 includes a game performance management means 211, a notification performance management means 212, and a lamp performance control means 213, and the sub-main communication control means 230 includes a control command reception means 231, a performance command transmission means 232, and a status command. A receiving means 233 is provided. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the sub-main control means 200A includes hardware such as a sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, electronic circuits, etc. arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. 2, and a control program stored in the ROM 72. This is a functional representation of what is constructed by software such as.

(Each means constituting the production management means 210)
The game effect management means 211 mainly controls the timing of execution of the image and sound effects (also referred to as "game effects") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, mainly for the purpose of increasing the interest and gameplay of the game. It is configured to manage based on control commands from the means 100. Examples of game performances include continuous performances, single-shot performances, and assist performances.

A continuous performance is a performance that continues over a plurality of game periods, and mainly uses the image display device 11 to display images that form a continuous story over a plurality of game periods, Examples include displaying an effect image or the like that symbolizes staying in a predetermined game mode (for example, game mode 5). In addition, when performing a continuous performance or a single performance described below, it is possible to perform a performance using the performance lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b or decorative lamps 32a, 32b, or use the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b. You may also perform a combination of performances.

A one-shot performance is a performance that is performed one-off when a specific situation occurs during the progress of the game. For example, when each reel rotates, the image display device 11 may display an image that suggests the degree of expectation of winning a winning combination. Further, when the number of AT games (number of bells) is added in the main control means 100, the value of the added number of AT games (for example, characters such as "+10") is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11. The performance displayed above is also an example of a single performance.

The assist performance is a performance to support the player, and in this embodiment, the push navigation performance is mainly performed in accordance with the information on the navigation number transmitted by the navigation number command from the main control means 100. This push navigation effect (sub-side push navigation) uses the image display device 11 as a sub-side push order display to show the player the push order (correct push order) according to the navigation number on the display screen 11a. This is a one-shot performance displayed on the screen. In this embodiment, the RP navigation performance (sub-side RP navigation) corresponding to the above-mentioned RP navigation, the winning navigation performance (sub-side winning navigation) corresponding to the winning navigation, and the eye-pressing navigation performance (corresponding to the eye-pressing navigation) are provided. sub-side navigation) is now executed.

Specific modes of the push navigation presentation (RP navigation presentation, winning navigation presentation) that notify the push order include a mode that displays numbers indicating the corresponding press order (for example, in the case of the push order of "first on the left", "1" is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 11a, and if the push order is "middle left/right", numbers indicating the push order are arranged from the left in the order "2, 1, 3" at the bottom of the display screen 11a. An example of this is the manner in which the notification is made. When displaying the order from the first press to the third press, when the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed first press order, the first press order disappears and the displayed second press order disappears. When the player operates the second stop switch according to the pressing order, the display for the second pressing order disappears, and when the player operates the third stop switch according to the displayed third pressing order, the display for the third pressing order disappears. The display may also be turned off.

Further, if the player operates the stop switch in a different order from the displayed push order, the push navigation performance may be immediately ended. Furthermore, when displaying the pressing order, the sounds "Naka", "Hidari", and "Migi" are output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. in association with the next operation to be performed. You can. Furthermore, the effect lamp 13a may be made to correspond to the "left", the effect lamp 12 to the "middle", and the effect lamp 13b to the "right", and may be emitted or blinked in association with the next operation to be performed. Further, a display device for performing sub-side push navigation may be provided. For example, if a display consisting of three 7-segment lamps arranged horizontally is provided below the display window W, and the pressing order is "right middle left," each of the 7-segment lamps on the left, center, and right side will be pressed. Examples include displaying the numbers ``3'', ``2'', and ``1'', respectively.

The notification effect management means 212 mainly controls the timing of execution of the image and audio effects (hereinafter referred to as "notification effect") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, mainly for the purpose of notifying players of information regarding the game. It is configured to be managed based on control commands from the control means 100. Examples of notification effects include error notification effects that notify text information that an error has occurred, such as ``Error Occurred,'' and ``Image Preparing'' to indicate that an image is being prepared when the power is restored. An example of this is a presentation that provides text information. In addition, in order to prevent players from becoming too absorbed in the game, they are also notified of effects that display images containing text information to call the players' attention (also referred to as "attention-calling images"). This is an example of directing.

The lamp effect control means 213 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and back lamps 38a to 38d. It is also configured to perform suggestive effects, which will be described later.

(Each means constituting the sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive a control command from the main control means 100 and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control command).

The effect command transmitting means 232 is configured to transmit an effect command including various information regarding effects (for example, an effect command including image information, etc.) to the sub-sub control means 200B based on a control command from the main control means 100. ing.

The status command receiving means 233 receives a status command (for example, a status command including information that a reception error of a production command has occurred) from the sub-sub control means 200B, and stores it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, the received command buffer for status commands).

In contrast to the sub-main control means 200A configured as above, the sub-sub control means 200B includes, roughly speaking, an effect execution control means 250 and a sub-sub communication control means 270. The performance execution control means 250 includes a game performance execution control means 251 and a notification performance execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 includes a performance command reception means 271 and a status command transmission means 272. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the sub-sub control means 200B includes hardware such as a sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 76. This is a functional representation of what is made up of clothing.

(Each means constituting the production execution control means 250)
The game effect execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned game effect.

The notification effect execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned notification effect.

(Each means constituting the sub-sub communication control means 270)
The performance command receiving means 271 is configured to receive the performance command from the sub-main control means 200A and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received performance command).

The status command transmitting means 272 is configured to transmit the above-mentioned status command to the sub-main control means 200A.

The above-mentioned transmission of control commands from the control command transmission means 151, transmission of production commands from the production command transmission means 232, and transmission of status commands from the status command transmission means 272 are all performed by a serial communication method (parallel communication method). (This may be done using a communication method.) Each of the transmitting means 151, 232, and 272 has a similar configuration, including a command buffer (also referred to as "CB") as a storage area for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted, and a command buffer for writing and reading commands to be transmitted. The device includes a command processing unit that performs processing such as the following, and a command transmission unit that transmits commands through serial communication.

The CB has a plurality of storage areas distinguished by respective addresses, and is configured such that 1 byte of command data can be stored in each storage area. The command processing unit generates command data to be transmitted, writes it to the address area indicated by the write pointer of the CB, reads previously written command data from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB, and uses it as the command. The data is configured to be written to the TDR (transmission data register) of the transmitter. The command transmitter is configured to transfer command data written in the TDR to a TSR (transmission shift register), convert it into serial data there, and transmit it.

Note that when performing the parallel communication method, the previously written command data is read from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB, and the command data is sent to a predetermined output port (an output port for transmitting to the sub-control means). is configured to send by writing to . One command in this embodiment usually has a 2-byte structure (the checksum has a 1-byte structure). The communication method is an asynchronous method, and has one stop bit and one parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command configuration can be changed as appropriate).

<Design displayed in the design display area>
As shown in FIG. 29(A), three display designs, ie, display design GK1, display design GK2, and display design GK3, are displayed in the design display area DA1 (see also FIG. 1). The display pattern GK1 is a pattern in which three patterns, ``Blue Bar,'' ``Blue Bar,'' and ``Red Seven,'' are arranged horizontally in this order from the left side on the background part BK1. The pattern GK2 is a pattern in which three patterns "black bar", "black bar", and "red seven" are arranged horizontally in this order from the left on the background part BK2. The display pattern GK3 is a pattern in which three patterns ".", ".", and "red seven" are arranged horizontally in this order from the left side on the background part BK2.

The display pattern GK1 is a pattern that allows the player to understand that it represents the corresponding symbols of BB role 1, "Blue bar, blue bar, red seven," and the display pattern GK2 is a pattern that represents the corresponding symbols of BB role 2, "Black." The pattern allows the player to understand that it represents "bar, black bar, red seven." On the other hand, the display pattern GK3 is a pattern that reminds the player of a symbol combination in which "Red Seven" is located on the right side, for example, "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven." Note that the background portion BK3 of the display pattern GK3 is colored in the same color as or similar to the color (red) of the pattern "Red Seven". Furthermore, the background part BK1 of the display pattern GK1 may be colored the same color as or similar to the color (blue) of the pattern "blue bar", or the background part BK2 of the display pattern GK2 may be colored with the color (blue) of the pattern "black bar". It may be colored in the same color or similar color (black). Instead of the symbol "Red Seven" in the display symbol GK3, a symbol that is not provided on the reels, for example, a symbol such as "☆" may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 29(B), in the symbol display area DA2 (see also FIG. 1), three "Red Seven" symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. The system is designed to make players aware of the symbol combinations of ``Red Seven and Red Seven.'' In addition, the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" corresponds to the small role 40 that can only be realized in RT2 (while the BB is in operation), and in RT1 (while inside the BB), When the winning combination result (for example, winning-A1 to A12 condition device or winning-B1 to B12 condition device) is selected, if the symbol “Red Seven” can be drawn depending on the pressing order and position, it will be displayed as a losing symbol. This is a pattern combination that may be used.

〈Suggestive performance〉
On the rear side of the pattern display area DA1 shown in FIG. By blinking, the display patterns GK1 to GK3 can be illuminated from the back side to make them stand out. Turning on and off of the pattern illumination lamp is controlled by the sub-control means.

In this embodiment, suggestion production (suggestion notification) is performed using a pattern illumination lamp. Suggestive effects are effects that suggest symbol combinations that the player can aim for by pressing their eyes, and as shown in FIG. 30, four types of suggestive effects, suggestion patterns 1 to 4, are performed. Suggestion pattern 1 is a suggestion effect in which two of the three display patterns GK1 to GK3 are illuminated from the back side with a pattern illumination lamp to make them stand out. The suggestion pattern 2 is a suggestion effect in which only the display pattern GK3 out of the three display patterns GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side with a pattern illumination lamp to make it stand out. The suggestion pattern 3 is a suggestion effect in which only the display pattern GK1 out of the three display patterns GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side with a pattern illumination lamp to make it stand out. The suggestion pattern 4 is a suggestion effect in which only the display pattern GK2 out of the three display patterns GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side with a pattern illumination lamp to make it stand out. In addition, in FIG. 30, a pattern whose frame line is a dashed dotted line indicates that the pattern is illuminated from the back side.

The suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 2 is basically performed when the BB is won while the AT is won. Specifically, when the start lever is operated, the sub-control means mainly controls the information (command) of the AT winning flag = 1 and the information (command) of the production group A number 1 (indicating that BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been won). In response to the reception from the means, suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 2 is performed. By performing the suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 2, the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" is displayed in the order of pressing "Right First" (in the display pattern GK3, the symbol "Red Seven" is placed on the right side). It is possible to encourage the player to aim for the target (because the target is the target). With this suggestive effect, the player can aim for the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" and the corresponding symbol "Blue Bar, Blue Bar, Red Seven" for BB Role 1 and the corresponding symbol "Black Bar" for BB Role 2.・The "black bar and red seven" are no longer aligned, and as a result, it is possible to shift to AT (gaming mode 3) while the BB is still inside. Since the AT inside the BB is in a gaming state that is very advantageous for the player, the suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 2 is also a performance that leads the player to an advantageous gaming state. Note that when performing the suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 2, a voice such as "Aim for the red seven" may be output.

The suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 1 is basically performed when the BB is won without the AT winning. Specifically, when the start lever is operated, the sub-control means mainly controls the information (command) of the AT winning flag = 0 and the information (command) of the production group A number 1 (indicating that BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been won). In response to the reception from the means, the suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 1 is performed. The suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 1 is BB role 1 whose corresponding symbol is the symbol combination "Blue bar, blue bar, red seven", and BB role 2 whose corresponding symbol is the symbol combination "black bar, black bar, red seven". It is clear that one of the winners is the winner, but it is not clear which one is the winner. Therefore, by performing the suggestion pattern 1, the player is made to think about whether BB role 1 or BB role 2 is winning, and to aim for the corresponding symbol of the one they think is this one by pressing their eyes. Since the game can be made more playful, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, when the suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 1 is performed, even if the player is good at eye-catching, there is a probability that about half of the players will not be able to make the BB winning combination and will be transferred to the BB interior. That will happen. Therefore, the suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 1 also has a function for adjusting the ball output rate in a case where the ball output rate is different between when the BB is inside and when the BB is in operation.

The suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 3 and the suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 4 are basically performed at a predetermined timing after all rotations have stopped in the game in which the suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 1 was performed (for example, when the rotation of the rotation of the next game starts) time). Specifically, after all the drums have stopped, the sub-control means receives the information of bonus condition device number 1 (BB role 1 winning) from the main control means, and the suggestion performance of suggestion pattern 3 is performed, and the bonus The suggestion performance of the suggestion pattern 4 is performed when the sub-control means receives the information of the condition device number 2 (BB winning combination 2) from the main control means. The suggestion performances of suggestion patterns 3 and 4 are performances that make it clear which of BB role 1 and BB role 2 has won. Therefore, by performing the suggestion effects of suggestion patterns 3 and 4, it is possible to make the player aim at the symbol corresponding to the winning BB combination by pressing his or her eyes. Note that the image display device 11 may be used to display the above-mentioned suggestive effects and designs (design combinations).

〈Performance performance〉
In this embodiment, a red seven reel effect is performed as a spinning drum effect performed during freezing. The red seven reel effect is a reel effect in which three symbols "red seven" are lined up in the display window W and stopped and displayed, and is mainly used when AT enters, specifically when the BB is in the AT winning state. At the time of winning, the suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 2 was performed, but the symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" could be stopped and displayed in the display window W at the timing of the player's eye press. This will be done if it is not possible. In addition, even when entering AT, if the corresponding symbols of BB role 1 "Blue bar, blue bar, red seven" and the corresponding symbols of BB role 2 "black bar, black bar, red seven" are stopped and displayed. , there will be no red seven reel performance. By performing such a red seven reel performance, even if the symbols "red seven" cannot be aligned by eye pressing, the symbols "red seven" can be displayed in alignment. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player with the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" as a symbol combination that triggers the transition to game mode 3 and the start of AT gaming while inside the BB. can. Note that the red seven reel performance is also executed when the next AT is continuously performed after one AT due to the presence of AT stock.

In addition to the red seven reel performance, there will also be a gold seven reel performance and a gold seven promotion reel performance. The gold seven reel performance is a reel performance in which three symbols "Gold Seven" are lined up in the display window W and stopped and displayed, and the gold seven promotion reel production is the three symbols "red seven" displayed in the display window W. This is a drum production in which the drum is rotated again after being aligned within the display window W and stopped and displayed.

〈Display percentage of all red sevens〉
In this embodiment, as an opportunity for the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" to be stopped and displayed in the display window W, when BB is not activated (during non-RT or during RT1), BB combination 1 or BB There are times when win 2 is won and times when a round drum performance is performed, and there is a time when small win 40 is won while the BB is in operation. Comparing when BB is working and when BB is not working, when BB is not working it is better than when BB is working.
The percentage of symbol combinations "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" being displayed is high. Also, if you compare the winning of BB role 1 or BB role 2 with the time when the round drum performance is performed, the symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" is better when the round drum performance is performed. The display rate is increasing.

The symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" (also referred to as "Red Seven Set") displayed in the symbol display area DA2 is displayed in the display window W while the BB is inactive, and when the BB When displayed in the display window W during operation, the function is different. In other words, a set of red sevens displayed while the BB is not in operation has the function of notifying the start of an AT game, and a set of red sevens displayed while the BB is in operation indicates that a small winning of 40 (one-card winning) has been established. It has a function to notify. In this embodiment, the percentage of red sevens displayed is higher when the BB is not operating than when the BB is active, so the red sevens are used as an opportunity to start AT gaming (transition to an advantageous state). It becomes possible to make a strong impression on the player as a symbol combination. In addition, when winning BB Role 1 or BB Role 2, the percentage of cases in which the red seven set is displayed due to the player's eye press being successful is higher than the case where the red seven set is displayed due to the player's eye press failure. Since the percentage of cases where the AT game is started is higher, even players who are not good at eye-catching can be made to accurately understand that the AT game will start (the current game status), so they can easily play the game. can proceed smoothly.

<Ending performance>
In this embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the number of games stayed during the advantageous section exceeds 1500 or when the values of the net increase counter and the correction counter exceed their respective upper limits. If the advantageous period ends without any warning, there is a risk that the player will be disappointed and lose his desire to play. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the image display device 11 is used to perform an effect (also referred to as an "ending effect") for indicating to the player the end time of the advantageous section. This type of ending effect is also performed in conventional gaming machines, but the purpose of the previous ones was to notify the player that the end of the advantageous section was approaching, and the gameplay was reduced. It was scarce. Therefore, in the ending performance of this embodiment, the content of the performance is configured to change in a plurality of ways according to the progress of the game during the advantageous section, and benefits are given to the player depending on the manner of the change. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in how the ending effect changes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. A specific example of the ending effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

Ending performance 1 shown in FIG. 31(A) is such that the content of the performance changes depending on the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games played after moving to the advantageous section), and the bonus is the slot machine 1. This is a suggestion for the setting value. In this ending effect 1, the image GZ1 is displayed on the image display screen 11a during the period when the number of games in the advantageous section is 0 to 250. Image GZ1 may be a still image or a moving image (the same applies to other images GZ2 to GZ10). The display content is not particularly limited, but may, for example, indicate that an advantageous period has begun or display the expected value of the number of game medals to be obtained. Next, during the period when the number of games in the advantageous section is 251 to 500, the image GZ1 is switched to the image GZ2 or the image GZ5 at a predetermined timing (for example, triggered by winning a predetermined game combination). Image GZ2 and image GZ5 have different display contents.

Furthermore, images are switched at a predetermined timing during a period in which the number of games in the advantageous section is 251 to 500. In this example, when image GZ2 is displayed, the image GZ2 is switched to image GZ3 or image GZ6, and when image GZ5 is displayed, image GZ5 is switched to image GZ6 or image GZ8. Images GZ3, GZ6, and GZ8 have different display contents. Furthermore, during the period when the number of games in the advantageous section is 1001 to 1500,
Images are switched at a predetermined timing. In this example, when image GZ3 is displayed, the image GZ3 is switched to image GZ4 or image GZ7, and when image GZ6 is displayed, image GZ6 is switched to image GZ7 or image GZ9. Furthermore, when image GZ8 is being displayed, it is switched from image GZ8 to image GZ9 or image GZ10.

The content suggested to the player differs depending on which of the images GZ4, GZ7, GZ9, and GZ10 is displayed. In other words, image GZ4 indicates that the setting value of slot machine 1 may be setting 6 (setting 6 suggestion), and image GZ7 indicates that setting value may be setting 3 or setting 6. (Settings 3 and 6 suggested). On the other hand, GZ9 and GZ10 do not suggest setting values. How the images change is determined at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transition to an advantageous section) by the lottery for ending effect 1 shown in FIG. 33(A). In this lottery, any one image transition is selected out of eight image switching flows (also referred to as "image transitions"), and the selection probability is determined by the setting value of the slot machine 1. is set to change. For example, the probability that the image transition GZ1→GZ2→GZ3→GZ4 is selected is 0 for setting 1, 10/256 for setting 3, and 32/256 for setting 6.

The ending effect 2 shown in FIG. 31(B) is such that the effect changes according to the value of the correction counter, and the flow of image switching and benefits are as shown in the figure. Further, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the ending effect 2 lottery shown in FIG. 33(B). Image GZ4 in ending effect 2 indicates that setting 6 is certain (setting 6 confirmed), and is more appealing to the player than image GZ4 in ending effects 1 and 3 (setting 6 suggested). It is highly reliable.

The ending effect 3 shown in FIG. 32(A) is such that the effect changes depending on the number of winnings (difference number) during the advantageous section, and the flow of image switching and benefits are as shown in the figure. . Furthermore, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the drawing for the ending effect 3 shown in FIG. 33(C).

The ending effect 4 shown in FIG. 32(B) is such that the effect changes depending on the point value given during the advantageous section, and the flow of image switching and benefits are as shown. Further, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the drawing for the ending effect 4 shown in FIG. 33(D). Image GZ4 in ending effect 4 has content that indicates that setting 6 is certain (setting 6 confirmed), and is more reliable for the player than image GZ4 in ending effects 1 and 3. It becomes. Note that the awarded point value refers to some kind of premium, different from game medals, that is awarded to the player according to the result of a winning lottery during the game (may be limited to during the bonus game or AT game). It means the number of benefits (for example, wallpaper data, etc.) granted. Furthermore, the advantageous section may be configured to end when the awarded point value exceeds the upper limit (for example, 10,000).

In the ending effects 1 to 4, the images are switched based on one variable (the number of games in the advantageous period or the correction counter value) that changes during the advantageous period. The image may be switched based on the corrected counter value, the corrected counter value, and the assigned point value). When switching images based on multiple variables, you can perform image switching based on the variable that reaches the image switching timing first, or you can perform image switching with priority given to one of the variables. You may. For example, when images are switched based on two variables, the number of acquisitions and the point value awarded, the images may be switched with priority given to the number of acquisitions that is more relevant to the balls put out. Further, the contents of the benefits given to the player according to the result of the ending performance are not limited to setting value suggestions, and can be changed as appropriate.

[Main control processing]
Hereinafter, among the control processes performed in the main control means 100 of the slot machine 1, particularly the setting change process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process will be explained with additional reference to FIGS. 34 to 62. A brief explanation of variables such as counters and flags used in the following explanation is given in the variable list in FIG. 18.

<Settings change process>
First, the basic flow of setting change device processing will be described with reference to FIG. 34(A). The settings change device process is executed when settings are changed, and stores "0" in all RWMs (addresses in the RAM 63 that store information regarding advantageous sections) that affect the performance of the instruction function. (Step K1).

<Game progress control processing>
Next, the basic flow of the game progress control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 34(B) to 61. The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during the game, and as shown in FIG. 34(B), first, a standby process at the start of the game is performed (step S1). In this game start standby process, as shown in FIG. 34(C), it is determined whether the full stop wait number is 0 (step S11). Here, if the all-stop wait number is not 0, wait for the waiting time corresponding to the all-stop wait number (step S12), and proceed to step S13; if the all-stop wait number is 0, The process directly advances to step S13. Then, in step S13, 0 is stored in the all-stop wait number, the game start standby process is ended, and the process returns.

After the game start standby process ends, the process advances to step S2 in FIG. 34(B). Here, the process waits in that state until the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted, and when the operation is accepted, internal lottery start processing is performed (step S3). In this internal lottery start process, as shown in FIG. 35(A), an internal lottery is performed (step S21). In this internal lottery, a bonus condition device number and a winning replay condition device number are determined. After executing the internal lottery, proceed to group number set processing.

In the group number setting process, as shown in FIG. 35(B), a value corresponding to the bonus condition device number (see FIG. 27(A)) is stored in the effect group A number (step S31), and the effect group B number is A value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number (see FIG. 27(B)) is stored in (step S32). Next, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number (see FIG. 28, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the condition device group A number (step S33), and the performance group A number and performance are stored in the condition device group D number. A value corresponding to the group B number is saved (step S34), and a value corresponding to the performance group A number and the performance group B number is stored in the condition device group G number (step S35).

Similarly, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group B number (step S36), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group C number. A value corresponding to the performance group A number and the performance group B number is stored in the condition device group E number (step S38). Furthermore, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group I number (step S39), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group F number. (step S40), and stores a value corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number in the condition device group H number (step S41). Then, the value corresponding to the performance group A number and the performance group B number is stored in the condition device group J number (step S42), and the process proceeds to the section type number management lever process.

In the section type number management lever process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (normal section) (step S51). Here, if the section type number is 0, the process proceeds to step S52, and it is determined whether the BB is not activated. Here, if the BB is not activated, it is determined whether or not the BB is inside (step S53). If the BB is not inside, the process directly proceeds to step S55, and if the BB is inside, the condition device group It is determined whether the A number is 1 (step S54), and if the conditional device group A number is 1, the process advances to step S51. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52 that the BB is in operation, or if the conditional device group A number is not 1 in the determination in step S54, the process does not proceed to step S51 and proceeds to standby effect processing to be described later.

In step S51, advantageous section transition processing is performed. In this advantageous section transition process, as shown in FIG. 38(A), it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 0 (step S71), and if it is 0, the advantageous section transition process is immediately terminated. and return. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 0, an advantageous section lottery is performed (step S72), and the lottery result is stored in the section type number (step S73). Next, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S74), and if it is 0, the advantageous section transition process is directly terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, chance mode 1 lottery is performed (step S75), and the lottery result is stored in the chance mode number (step S76). Further, a seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S77), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S78).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 (step S79). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process advances to step S83 and a chance game number lottery process is performed. In this chance game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 38(B), a chance game number lottery is performed (step S91), the lottery result is stored in the chance game number counter (step S92), and the process returns. Upon return from the chance game number lottery process, the process proceeds to step S84 in FIG. 38(A), where a chance cycle lottery is performed. Then, the lottery result is stored in the chance cycle counter, the advantageous section transition process is completed, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S79 that the chance mode number is 4, the process proceeds to step S80, and AT winning processing is performed. In this AT winning process, as shown in FIG. 39, first, 1 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S101). Next, an AT mode lottery is performed and the lottery result is stored in the AT mode number (step S102), and a 71 lottery is performed and the lottery result is stored in the 7 number (step S103). Next, seven number correction processing is performed (step S104).

In this seven number correction process, as shown in FIG. 40(A), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S121). In this correction counter processing, as shown in FIG. 40(B), correction counter data (a counter that adds up the value of the gold seven counter and the value of the seven counter) is set to 0 (step S131), and the seven number is 2. It is determined whether there is one (step S132). Here, if the seven number is 2, the value of the gold seven counter is set in the correction counter data (step S133), 1 is further added to the correction counter data (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S132 that the number seven is not 2, the process directly proceeds to step S135. In this step S135, the value of the seven counter is added to the correction counter data, and the process proceeds to step S136. In step S136, the value calculated based on each value of the cumulative counter, the correction counter data, and the number of bells counter is stored in the correction counter data, and the process returns from the correction counter process.

Upon return from the correction counter process, the process advances to step S122 in FIG. 40(A), and it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more. Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more, store 1 in the seven number (step S123), then end the seven number correction process and return; if the value of the correction counter is not 1901 or more, Return as is. In the arrival flag processing to be described later, the processing procedure is branched depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 2101 or more. On the other hand, in this process, it is determined whether or not to store 1 in the seven number depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more. ) are different. This is because by storing 1 in the 7 number, it is possible to play AT games at least once next time, so the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future will increase accordingly, and the discriminant value will be used in the attainment flag processing. This is set to be less than 2101. In this way, by changing the discrimination value according to the situation, the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future can be managed without excessively counting more than necessary.

Upon return from the seven number correction process, the process proceeds to step S105 in FIG. 39, where it is determined whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is not 1, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S106), and the process proceeds to step S107. If the seven number is 1, the process directly proceeds to step S107. In this step S107, arrival flag processing is performed.

In this arrival flag processing, as shown in FIG. 40(C), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S141). After the correction counter processing is finished, it is determined whether the correction counter is 2101 or more (step S142), and if it is 2101 or more, 1 is stored in the arrival flag (step S143), and the arrival flag processing is ended. and return. On the other hand, if the correction counter is not 2101 or more, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 or not (step S144). If it is 3, the process returns as is. If it is not 3, 0 is saved in the arrival flag. From (step S145), the process returns.

Upon return from the arrival flag processing, the process advances to step S108 in FIG. 39(A), and it is determined whether the conditional device group A number is 1 or not. Here, if the conditional device group A number is 1, the AT winning process is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the conditional device group A number is not 1, EX mode 1 lottery is performed (step S109), the lottery result is saved in the EX mode number (step S110), and the AT winning process is ended. Return.

Upon return from the AT winning process, the process advances to step S81 in FIG. 38(A), and it is determined whether the conditional device group A number is 1 or not. Here, if the conditional device group A number is not 1, the process immediately ends the transition to an advantageous section and returns, and if the conditional device group A number is 1, the AT entry lever process is performed (step S82).

In this AT entry lever process, as shown in FIG. 41, first, a loop CU rank set process is performed (step S151). In the loop CU rank set process, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the seven set counter is incremented by 1 (step S171), and the value corresponding to the seven table number and seven set counter is stored in the loop number (step S172). , stores the seven table number and the value corresponding to the seven set counter in the CU rank number (step S173), and returns.

Upon return from the loop CU rank set process, the process advances to step S152 in FIG. 41, and it is determined whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is 1, the process advances to step S154 and a seven loop lottery process is performed. In the seven-loop lottery process, as shown in FIG. 42(B), a seven-loop lottery is performed (step S181), the lottery result is stored in the seven counter (step S182), and the process returns. Upon return from the seven loop lottery process, the process proceeds to step S155 in FIG. 41, where the arrival flag process is executed and the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S153 that the value of the seven counter is not 0, the process directly proceeds to step S156. Further, in the determination in step S152, if the seven number is not 1, the value of the gold seven counter is subtracted by 1 (step S158), and the gold seven loop lottery correction process is performed (step S159).

In this gold seven loop lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 42(C), it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not, and if it is not 0, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is directly terminated and the process returns. . On the other hand, if the arrival flag is 0, correction counter processing is performed (step S192), and after the completion of the correction counter processing, it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 (step S193). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is directly ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900, a gold seven loop lottery is performed (step S194), and it is determined whether the result is 0 (step S195). Here, if the result of the Gold Seven Loop Lottery is 0, the Gold Seven Loop Lottery correction process is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the gold seven loop lottery is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S196), the arrival flag process is executed (step S197), and the process returns.

Upon return from the gold seven loop lottery correction process, the process proceeds to step S156 in FIG. 41, where an additional mode lottery is performed and the result is stored in the additional mode number (step S157). Next, a correction counter process is performed (step S160), and after the completion of the process, one drawing of the number of bells is performed (step S161), and the result is stored in the number of bells counter (step S162). Next, a bell number counter correction process is performed (step S163).

In this bell number counter correction process, as shown in FIG. The value of the number of bells allowed until the value is reached is stored (step S201). Next, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S202), and if it is not 0, the process directly proceeds to step S203, and if it is 0, the value of the correction counter is smaller than the value of the number of bells counter. It is determined whether or not (step S206), and if it is small, the process advances to step S203. In step S203, 7 is saved in the bell number counter, and after saving, the bell number counter correction process is ended and the process returns. Upon return from the bell number counter correction process, the process proceeds to step S164 in FIG. 41, where the arrival flag process is executed, the AT entry lever process is completed, and the process returns. Upon return from the AT entry lever process, the advantageous section transition process in FIG. 38 is also completed and the process returns, proceeding to step S56 in FIG. 36, where the lever wait process is executed.

In this lever wait process, as shown in FIG. 44, first, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S211). Here, if the conditional device group A number is 1, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not (step S212), and if the AT winning flag is 0, 2 is stored in the lever weight number. (Step S213), and if it is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever weight number (Step S214). After saving, the lever wait process is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S211 that the conditional device group A number is not 1, the process advances to step S215, and it is determined whether the main game state number is smaller than 2 or not. Here, if the main game state number is smaller than 2, the process directly advances to step S217, and if the main game state number is 2 or more,
It is determined whether the main game state number is 4 (step S230), and if it is 4, the process advances to step S217. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not 4, the lever wait process is immediately terminated and the process returns.

In step S217, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not, and if it is 0, the lever wait process is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT winning flag is not 0, a production lever weight lottery is performed (step S2189). Then, it is determined whether or not the result is 0 (step S219), and if it is 0, the lever wait process is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the effect lever weight lottery is not 0, the process advances to step S213 and stores 2 as the lever weight number. After storing, the lever weight process is finished and the process returns. Upon return from the lever wait process, the process returns to the section type number management lever process in FIG. 36, and proceeds to the standby effect process to be described later.

On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0 in the determination in step S51 of FIG. 36, 0 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S57), and it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 ( Step S58). Here, if the condition device group A number is 1, 1 is stored in the 1st type BB winning flag (step S59), and if it is not 1, 0 is stored in the 1st type BB winning flag (step S60). ). After saving, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is one of 13 to 36 (step S61). Here, if the winning replay condition device number is one of 13 to 36, the instruction number stores a value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number (step S62), and then goes to step S63 in FIG. If the winning replay condition device number is not one of 13 to 36, the process directly advances to step S63.

In step S63, the main game state number is determined, and according to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 1, the main game state number 1 lever process is performed (step S64), and if the main game state number is 2, the main game state number is 2. If so, main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S65). Also, if the main game state number is 3, the main game state number 3 lever process is performed (step S66), and if the main game state number is 4, the main game state number 4 lever process is performed (step S67), and the main game state number 3 lever process is performed (step S67). If the state number is 5, main game state number 2, 5 lever processing is performed (step S68). After each lever process is executed, the process advances to step S56 in FIG. On the other hand, if the main game state number is any other number, no particular processing is performed and the process directly advances to step S56.

In the main game state number 1 lever process, as shown in FIG. 45(A), a chance mode 2 lottery is performed (step S241), and then a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S2421). In this chance mode number determination process, as shown in FIG. 45(B), it is determined whether the lottery result of chance mode 2 lottery or chance mode 3 lottery is 0 (step S251). Here, if the lottery result is 0, the process immediately ends the chance mode number determination process and returns; if the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the chance mode number (step S252), and then the process returns. do.

Upon return from the chance mode number determination process, the process advances to step S243 in FIG. 45(A), and it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 or not. Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process advances to step S247, and it is determined whether or not the 1st type BB winning flag is 0. If it is 0, the main game state number 1 lever processing is immediately terminated. If the number is not 0, a chance game number lottery process is performed, and after that, the main game state number 1 lever process is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S242 that the chance mode number is 4, the process proceeds to step S244, and AT winning processing is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 (step S245).
, if it is 0, then the main game state number 1 lever process is immediately finished and the process returns; if it is not 0, the lever process is performed at the time of AT entry, and then the process returns.

In the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 45(C), first, the lever processing is performed after AT is won (step S261). In this AT post-winning lever process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S271). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the lever processing is finished after the AT is won and the process returns. If the arrival flag is 0, the process advances to step S272 and it is determined whether the EX mode number is 1 or not. do. Here, if the EX mode number is 1, an EX mode 2 lottery is performed (step S273), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 2 (step S274). Here, if the lottery result is 2, 2 is stored in the EX mode number (step S275), and the process proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S272 that the EX mode number is not 1, the process directly proceeds to step S276, and if the result of the EX mode 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination in step S274, the process directly proceeds to step S276. Proceed to.

In step S276, it is determined whether the seven table number is smaller than 13. Here, if the seven table number is smaller than 13, it is determined whether the drawn flag is 0 (step S277), and if it is 0, it is further determined whether the conditional device group G number is 0 or not. is determined (step S278), and if the condition device group G number is not 0, the process advances to step S279. In step S279, a Seven Table 2 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S280). Here, if the result of the Seven Table 2 lottery is 0, the process directly advances to step S282, and if the result of the Seven Table 2 lottery is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the Seven Table number (step S281). The process advances to step S282. In step S282, 1 is stored in the lottery completed flag, and the process proceeds to step S283. On the other hand, if the seven table number is 13 or more in the determination in step S276, if the drawn flag is not 0 in the determination in step S277, or if the conditional device group G number is 0 in the determination in step S278, From there, the process proceeds to step S283.

In step S283, it is determined whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the Seven number is 1, a Seven 2 lottery is performed (step S284), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 2 (step S285). Here, if the result of the 72 lottery is 2, the lottery result is stored in the 7 number (step S286), and a 7 number correction process is performed (step S287). After executing the seven number correction process, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 (step S288), and if it is 2, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S290. On the other hand, if the Seven number is not 1 in the determination at step S283, if the result of the Seven 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination in step S285, or if the seven number is not 2 in the determination in step S289, then The process advances to step S291. In step S291, a seven stock 1 drawing is performed, and the drawing result is added to the seven counter before proceeding to step S290. In this step S290, the arrival flag process is performed, and then the AT winning lever process is ended and the process returns.

Upon return from the lever process after the AT win, the process proceeds to step S262 in FIG. 45(C), and it is determined whether the 1st type BB win flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is immediately finished and the process returns; if it is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed, and then the game state number Finish the 2nd and 5th lever processing and return.

In the main game state number 3 lever process, as shown in FIG. 47(A), first, it is determined whether or not the instruction number is 0 (step S301). Here, if the instruction number is not 0, the value of the bell number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S302), and then the process proceeds to step S303. If the instruction number is 0, the process directly proceeds to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not. Here, if the reach flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever process is immediately finished and the process returns. If the reach flag is 0, a seven stock 2 drawing is performed (step S304), and the drawing result is It is added to the seven counter (step S306). Next, a reach flag process is performed (step S306), and it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 (step S307). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever process is finished and the process returns. If the arrival flag is 0, check whether the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2. Determination is made (step S308). Here, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 1 or 2, the main game state number 3 lever processing is immediately finished and the process returns, and if the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is performed. Proceed to correction processing.

In the money seven loop rewriting lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 47(B), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S311), and then it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 (step S312). ). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction process is immediately terminated and the process returns; if the value of the correction counter is less than 1900, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is performed (step S313 ), it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 (step S314). Here, if the result of the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is 0, the process immediately ends the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction process and returns; if it is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S316). Then, the arrival flag process is performed (step S316), and then the money seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is ended and the process returns. Upon return from the money seven loop rewrite lottery correction process, the main game state number 3 lever process in FIG. 47(A) is also completed and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 lever process, as shown in FIG. 48(A), a pullback 1 drawing is performed, and it is determined whether or not the drawing result is 0 (step S321). Here, if the result of the pullback 1 drawing is not 0, an AT winning process is performed (step S323), and then it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not (step S324). Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing is immediately finished and the process returns; if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed. After that (step S325), the main game state number 4 lever process is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S322 that the result of the pullback 1 drawing is 0, the process proceeds to step S326, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever process is immediately finished and the process returns, and if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is executed. Proceed to. In this AT cycle preferential game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the number of AT cycle preferential games is drawn (step S331), and the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S332). , the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process ends and returns. Upon return from this AT cycle preferential game number lottery process, the main game state number 4 lever process in FIG. 48(A) is also completed and the process returns.

Next, the standby effect process performed after the section type number management lever process in FIG. 49 will be explained. In this standby performance process, as shown in FIG. 49, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (step S341). Here, if the section type number is not 0, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 (step S342), and if the main game state number is 3, the value of the seven set counter is also 1. It is determined whether or not (step S344). Here, if the value of the seven set counter is 1, it is determined whether the seven table number is smaller than 15 (step S344), and if it is smaller than 15, the process proceeds to step S345, and if it is 15 or more, step S347 is performed. Proceed to. In step S347, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is one of 1 to 12 or 37 to 39. If it is determined that it is not one of them, the process advances to step S345, and one of them is determined. If it is determined that this is the case, the standby effect processing is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is 0 as determined in step S341, or if the main game state number is not 3 as determined in step S342, the process directly advances to step S345.

In step S345, it is determined whether the lever weight number is 0 or not. Here, if the lever weight number is 0, the process proceeds to step S345, and if the lever weight number is not 0, it waits for the time corresponding to the lever weight number, stores 0 in the lever weight number, and then ( Step S349), the process proceeds to step S346. In step S346, it is determined whether the standby performance number is 0 or not. Here, if the standby effect number is 0, the standby effect process is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, after executing the standby effect (step S349), the standby effect process is ended and the process returns.

Upon return from the end of the standby performance process, the section type number management lever process in FIG. 36 is also terminated, and thereby the internal lottery start process in FIG. 35(A) is also terminated, and the process proceeds to step S4 in FIG. 35(B). In this step S4, it is continuously determined whether or not all the spinning drums have stopped, and if all the spinning drums have stopped, game medals are paid out (only when a winning combination is achieved) (step S5), Further, in accordance with the number of game medals paid out, count management is performed such as updating the number displayed on a display (not shown) that displays the number of game medals acquired during AT (step S6). Thereafter, a section type number management game end process is performed (step S8).

In this section type number management game end process, as shown in FIG. 50, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S361). Here, if the section type number is 0, the section type number management game end process is directly ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S362), and cumulative counter processing is performed (step S363). In the cumulative counter process, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not a replay activation symbol (corresponding symbol of a replay combination) is displayed (step S381), and if it is displayed, the cumulative counter process is performed as is. Finish and return. On the other hand, if the replay activation symbol is not displayed, the number of game medals paid out (including the case of 0) is added to the value of the cumulative counter (step S382), and the value of the cumulative counter is subtracted by 3, and then (Step S383), the cumulative counter processing is ended and the process returns.

Upon return from the cumulative counter process, the process proceeds to step S364 in FIG. 50, where the main gaming state number is determined. Then, according to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, main game state number 0 full stop processing is performed (step S365), and if the main game state number is 1, main game state number 1 full stop processing is performed (step S365). Processing is performed (step S366), and if the main gaming state number is 2, main gaming state number 2 and 5 complete stop processing is performed (step S367). Further, if the main game state number is 3, main game state number 3 full stop processing is performed (step S368), and if the main game state number is 4, main game state number 4 full stop processing is performed (step S369), If the main game state number is 5, main game state numbers 2 and 5 are completely stopped (step S370). Furthermore, when the main game state number is 6, main game state number 6 full stop processing is performed (step S371), and when the main game state number is 7, main game state number 7 full stop processing is performed (step S372).

In the main game state number 0 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0 (step S391). Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the conditional device group A number is 1 (step S392), and if the conditional device group A number is 1, BB is not established. It is determined whether or not (step S392). If the BB is not established, 6 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S394), the main gaming state number 0 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination in step S392, and if BB is established in the determination in step S393, 0 is stored in the main game state number (step S396), and the main game state number is 0. Completes the total stop processing and returns. Furthermore, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S391, the process proceeds to step S396, where it is determined whether the conditional device group A number is 1 or not. Here, if the conditional device group A number is not 1, 2 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S398), the main gaming state number 0 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the conditional device group A number is 1, the process advances to step S397, and a game ending process upon entering AT is performed.

In this AT entry game end process, as shown in FIG. 53, 0 is saved in the chance mode number (step S401), 0 is saved in the chance game number counter (step S402), and 0 is saved in the chance cycle counter. (Step S403). Thereafter, 0 is stored in the EX mode number (step S404), 0 is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S405), and 0 is stored in the lottery completed flag (step S406). Furthermore, 3 is saved as the main game state number (step S407), and the advantageous section lamp is turned on (step S408).

Next, as shown in FIG. 54, it is determined whether or not three symbols "Red Seven" are displayed in a line on the upper line in the display window W in a stopped state (step S409), and if they are stopped in a row, step The process advances to step S410, and if the stopped display is not performed, the process advances to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not three symbols "Red Seven" are stopped and displayed on the active line 29 in the display window W. If they are stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S410, and the symbols are not stopped and displayed. If so, the process advances to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether or not the three symbols "Red Seven" are stopped and displayed on the lower line in the display window W. If they are stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S413. The process advances to step S414. In step S414, it is determined whether or not the three symbols "Red Seven" are lined up and stopped and displayed on a line descending to the right in the display window W. If they are stopped and displayed, the process advances to step S410, and the symbols are not stopped and displayed. If so, the process advances to step S415. In step S415, it is determined whether or not the three symbols "Red Seven" are lined up and stopped and displayed on the upward-rightward line in the display window W. If they are stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S410, and the symbols are not stopped and displayed. If so, the process advances to step S416.

If the process proceeds to step S410 (if three symbols of "Red Seven" are stopped and displayed in a line in the display window W), 1 is saved in the all-stop wait number, and 0 is saved in the standby performance number. (step S411), and the process advances to step S418 in FIG. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S416 (if the three symbols "Red Seven" are not stopped and displayed in a row in the display window W), 0 is stored in the all-stop wait number, and the standby performance number is 1 is stored in (step S417), and the process advances to step S418 in FIG. In this step S418, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 or not. Here, if the seven number is not 2, the process ends the game end process when AT enters and returns. If the seven number is 2, 2 is added to the standby performance number (step S419), and then AT Finish the game end processing at the time of entry and return. Upon return from the AT entry game end process, the main game state number 0 full stop process in FIG. 52 is also completed and the process returns.

In the main game state number 1 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the chance game counter is decremented by 1 (step S431), and the game is determined to be a BB operation ending game (a game in which the operation of the BB game ends). It is determined whether or not (step S432). Here, if it is not a BB operation-ending game, the process directly advances to step S435, and if it is a BB operation-ending game, 0 is stored in the chance game counter (step S433), and the chance cycle counter is subtracted by 1 (step S433). S434), the process advances to step S435. In step S435, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance game number counter is 0 (step S436), and if the value of the chance game number counter is 0, the chance period is further It is determined whether the value of the counter is 0 (step S437). Here, if the value of the chance cycle counter is 0, a chance mode 3 lottery is performed (step S438), and further a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S439).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 (step S441). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, 1 is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S441), the main game state number 1 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4, perform the AT winning process (step S445), then save 2 as the main game state number (step S448), and perform the main game state number 1 complete stop process. Finish and return. On the other hand, if the value of the chance game number counter is not 0 in the determination in step S436, and if the value of the chance cycle counter is not 0 in the determination in step S437, the process advances to step S442, and the first type BB winning flag is set to 0. Determine whether or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main gaming state number 1 complete stop processing is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, it is determined whether the 1st type BB activation symbol is hidden (step S443), and if the 1st type BB activation symbol is hidden, the main After storing 6 as the game state number (step S444), if the type 1 BB activation symbol is not hidden, the main game state number 1 complete stop process is immediately terminated and the process returns.

Further, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S435, the process proceeds to step S446, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, 2 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S448), the main gaming state number 1 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the AT entry game end process is performed (step S447), and then the main game state number 1 full stop process is ended and the process returns.

In the main game state numbers 2 and 5 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 55(B), it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 (step S421), and the 1st type BB winning flag is 0. If it is 0, leave it as is, type 1 BB winning. If the flag is not 0, perform the game end process when AT enters (step S422), complete the main game state number 2, 5 complete stop process, and return. .

In the main game state number 3 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell number counter is 0 (step S451). Here, if the value of the bell number counter is not 0, the main game state number 3 complete stop processing is immediately terminated and the process returns. If the value of the bell number counter is 0, the process advances to step S452 and the seven number is Determine whether it is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S452, and it is determined whether the value of the seven counter is 0. If the value of the seven counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative counter is It is determined whether the value of is smaller than 2001. Here, if the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001, it is determined whether the value of the arrival flag is 0 (step S455), and when the value of the arrival flag is 0, AT mode rewriting lottery is performed (step S455). S456). Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S457), and when the lottery result is 0, the process directly proceeds to step S459, and when the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the AT mode number. From (step S458), the process advances to step S459.

In step S459, an AT cycle lottery is performed, and the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S460). Further, a seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S462), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S463). Next, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is performed (step S464), and then 0 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S465), 0 is stored in the seven number (step S466), and 0 is stored in the seven counter. (Step S467). Next, 0 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S468), 0 is stored in the seven set counter (step S469), and 0 is stored in the loop number (step S470). Subsequently, 0 is stored in the CU rank number (step S471), 0 is stored in the arrival flag (step S472), and 0 is stored in the additional mode number (step S473). Further, 0 is stored in the bell number counter (step S474), and 0 is stored in the total acquisition counter (step S475). Then, 7 is saved as the main game state number (step S476), 2 is further saved as the full stop wait number (step S477), the main game state number 3 full stop process is completed, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the determination in step S452, and if the seven counter is not 0 in the determination in step S453, the process advances to step S481 in FIG. 57, and it is determined whether the value of the seven set counter is 7 or not. Determine. Here, if the value of the seven set counter is not 7, the process directly advances to step S484, and if the value of the seven set counter is 7, 15 is stored in the seven table number (step S482), and 0 is further added to the seven set counter. After saving (step S483), the process advances to step S484. In step S484, a loop CU rank set process is performed, and then it is determined whether the seven number is 1 (step S485). Here, if the seven number is not 1, it is determined whether the value of the gold seven counter is 0 (step S487), 1 is stored as the seven number (step S488), and the process proceeds to step S489. On the other hand, if the seven number is 1, the value of the seven counter is subtracted by 1 (step S488), and the process advances to step S489.

In step S489, it is determined whether the value of the seven counter is 0, and when the value of the seven counter is 0, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 (step S490). Here, if the attainment flag is 0, seven loop lottery processing (step S491) and attainment flag processing (step S492) are performed, and the process then proceeds to step S493. On the other hand, if the value of the seven counter is not 0 as determined in step S489, and if the arrival flag is not 0 as determined in step S490, the process directly proceeds to step S493. Further, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 0 in the determination in step S487, the process proceeds to step S495, and it is determined whether the value of the gold seven counter is 3 or not. Here, when the value of the gold seven counter is not 3, the process directly proceeds to step S497, and when the value of the gold seven counter is 3, 3 is stored in the standby performance number (step S496), and then the process proceeds to step S497. In step S497, the value of the gold seven counter is subtracted by 1, and further gold seven loop lottery processing is executed (step S498), and then the process advances to step S493.

In step S493, an additional mode lottery is performed, and the lottery result is stored in the additional mode number (step S494). After that, the process advances to step S501 in FIG. 56, and correction counter processing is performed. Next, a bell number switching lottery is performed (step S502), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 (step S503). Here, if the result of the bell number switching lottery is 0, the number of bells 2 is drawn (step S504), the drawing result is stored in the bell number counter (step S505), and the process proceeds to step S508, where the number of bells is drawn. If the result of the switching lottery is not 0, a 3-bell lottery is performed (step S506), the lottery result is stored in the bell counter (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, a bell number counter correction process is performed, and then, an arrival flag process is performed (step S509). Next, 3 is stored in the lever weight number (step S510), and it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0 (step S511). Here, if the standby performance number is 0, 1 is saved as the standby performance number (step S512), and the process proceeds to step S477 in FIG. 56. On the other hand, if the standby performance number is not 0, the process directly advances to step S477. Then, 2 is saved as the wait number at full stop, the main game state number 3 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 59, the value of the AT cycle preferential game number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S521), and it is determined whether the game is a BB operation end game ( Step S522). Here, if the game is not a BB operation-ending game, the process directly advances to step S525, and if the game is a BB operation-ending game, 0 is stored in the AT cycle preferential game counter (step S523), and further AT cycle After decrementing the counter value by 1 (step S524), the process proceeds to step S525. In step S525, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the AT cycle counter is 0 (step S526), and if the value of the AT cycle counter is also 0, a pullback 2 lottery is performed ( Step S527). Then, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S528), and when the lottery result is 0, 1 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter (step S529), and the main game state number 4 complete stop processing is executed. Finish and return.

On the other hand, if the value of the AT cycle counter is not 0 in the determination in step S526, the process proceeds to step S534, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, when the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 complete stop processing is directly terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the first type BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S535, and it is determined whether or not BB is not established. Then, if the BB is not established, the main game state number 4 complete stop processing is immediately finished and the process returns; if the BB is established, 7 is saved as the main game state number (step S536), and then the main game state number is 4 Complete the complete stop processing and return.

Further, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S525, the process proceeds to step S531, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the process advances to step S532, performs AT entry game end processing, completes main game state number 4 full stop processing, and returns. On the other hand, when the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the process advances to step S533, stores 5 in the main game state number, completes the main game state number 4 full stop process, and returns. Furthermore, if the result of the pullback 2 lottery is not 0 in the judgment in step S528, the process advances to step S530 and performs the AT winning process, after which 5 is saved in the main game state number (step S533), and the main Game state number 4 completes the full stop process and returns.

In the main game state number 6 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 60(A), it is determined whether the BB is established (step S541). Then, if the BB is not established, the main game state number 6 complete stop process is immediately finished and the process returns; if the BB is established, 1 is saved in the main game state number (step S542), and then the main game state number is 6 Complete the total stop processing and return.

In the main game state number 7 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 60(B), it is determined whether the BB is established (step S551). Then, if the BB is not established, the main game state number 7 complete stop process is immediately finished and the process returns; if the BB is established, 4 is saved as the main game state number (step S552), and then the main game state number is 6 Complete the total stop processing and return.

After executing each total stop process for main game state numbers 0 to 7, the process advances to step S373 in FIG. 50. Here, 0 is saved as the instruction number, the section type number management game end process is ended, and the process returns. Upon return from the section type number management game end process, the process proceeds to step S8 in FIG. 34(B), where advantageous section clear counter management processing is performed.

In the advantageous section clear counter management process, as shown in FIG. 61, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 from before the current subtraction. (Step S562). Here, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 before the current subtraction, the process advances to step S565, and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current subtraction. Here, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0 as a result of the current subtraction, the process directly advances to step S566. On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter does not become 0 even after the current subtraction, the process proceeds to step S567, and it is determined whether or not a re-game activation symbol has been displayed in the game. If the replay activation symbol is displayed in the game, the process directly advances to step S569, and if it is not displayed, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game medals paid out in the game is added to the net increase counter. From there (step S568), the process advances to step S569.

In step S569, it is determined whether the value of the net increase counter is 2401 or more. If the value of the net increase counter is less than 2401, the process proceeds to step S566, and if it is 2401 or more, the advantageous section clear counter management process is directly terminated. and return. In step S566, 0 is stored in all storage areas that store data values that affect the performance of the instruction function, and the process proceeds to step S563. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S562 that the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 before the current subtraction, the process directly proceeds to step S563. In step S563, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 or not. If the section type number is 0, the advantageous section clear counter management process is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1500 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter (step S564), and then the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended and the process returns.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. In this embodiment, processing is performed such as reading each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by a player, detecting (confirming) the signal level, transmitting each control command, and controlling the drive of the reels. This is performed by a timer interrupt process that is performed every preset constant time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 62, first, interrupt initial processing (saving registers, disabling interrupts, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then it is determined whether or not a power outage is detected. (Step MT12). Here, if a power-off is detected, power-off processing is performed (step MT25). In the power-off process, registers are saved, stack pointers are saved, interrupt states are saved, etc. Further, processing such as retention of information related to winning combination results and information related to gaming status (including information related to AT) stored in a predetermined storage area, and calculation and storage of a checksum is also performed.

On the other hand, if a power outage is not detected, processing is performed to update the interrupt counter value (subtract "1") (step MT13), and further timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement is performed by subtracting or adding the timer value of an arbitrary timer set in the game progress control process described above. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). In this input port reading, the signal level of each game operation signal inputted to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, a reel drive control process is performed to control the drive of the reels 3a to 3c (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stoppage maintenance, etc.) of the reels 3a to 3c (step MT16). In this reel drive control process, a reel drive pulse is output that indicates the timing to switch the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor according to the reel drive state (stopped, waiting for reel rotation, accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, etc.). Processes such as updating a counter value and acquiring, updating, and outputting reel drive pulse data for driving a stepping motor are performed. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether the reel drive control process has been executed for all reels, and if it has not been executed, the process returns to step MT16 and the reel drive control process is performed again. On the other hand, when executed for all reels, port output processing is performed to excite the reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (step MT18), and further control is performed to transmit the control commands stored in the control command buffer (CB). Command transmission processing is performed (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20, where the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in a predetermined storage area is read out, and the outer end signal is output. Next, an LED display is performed to cause the above-mentioned display lamp to perform a predetermined display (step MT21). In this LED display, for example, the following display is executed on the payout number display lamp 46j. In other words, if no errors (excluding E-type errors) have occurred, the number of payouts "0 to 9" will be displayed based on the number of game medals paid out, or the number "1 to 6" will be displayed based on the set value. display it. Further, when notifying the pressing order, display modes of instruction numbers "=1" to "=6" are displayed. Further, if an error (excluding E-type errors) has occurred, an error display is executed based on the value of the error number.

Next, the process proceeds to step MT22, where error management is performed. In this error management, first, error checking is performed. This error check includes determining whether an H0 error has occurred, determining whether a CE error has occurred, determining whether a CP error has occurred, determining whether a CH error has occurred, and determining whether a C0 error has occurred. It determines whether an error has occurred, determines whether a C1 error has occurred, determines whether an E6 error has occurred, determines whether an E7 error has occurred, and further determines whether an E6 error or When an E7 error occurs, processing is performed such as displaying an error on the payout number display lamp 46j and stopping the execution of the game. Note that when an E-type error occurs, recovery from the error is possible if the above-mentioned setting change processing is executed. After this error check, if an error has occurred, an output request set upon error detection is processed for transmitting error information to the sub-control means 200. After executing this error management process, a process is performed to update the random numbers used for role determination, etc. (step MT23), and an interrupt recovery process (register recovery, interrupt permission, etc.) is performed (step MT24), and the interrupt return do.

《Second embodiment》
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to a second embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a "second form slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 63 to 67. Below, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the second embodiment will be mainly explained. The characteristic portions described below are not limited to application to the slot machine of the second embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. Note that the slot machine of the second embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described for the slot machine 1 can be applied to the second embodiment of the slot machine in the same manner or with some changes in the process content.

<Stop switch unit>
The slot machine of the second form includes a stop switch unit 500, as shown in FIG. The stop switch unit 500 includes three stop switches 510, 5
20, 530 and a stop switch panel 540. The stop switch 510 includes a stop switch cover 512 having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a stop switch lamp 514 (the lamp itself is not shown) that includes an LED or the like built into the stop switch 510. The stop switch lamp 514 is configured to be able to be lit while changing the lighting mode or lighting color (color visually recognized through the stop switch cover 512) depending on the gaming state, the progress of the game, etc. The stop switch cover 512 is configured to be pressable by the player. Further, the stop switch cover 512 is made of a translucent material, and is configured so that the lighting mode and lighting color of the stop switch lamp 514 can be visually recognized by the player, the gaming clerk, and the like.

Stop switches 520 and 530 are configured similarly to stop switch 510. That is, the stop switch 520 includes a stop switch cover 522 and a stop switch lamp 524, and the stop switch 530 includes a stop switch cover 532 and a stop switch lamp 534. The stop switches 510, 520, 530 have the same functions as the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. That is, the stop switch 510 is operated when stopping the left reel, the stop switch 520 is operated when stopping the middle reel, and the stop switch 530 is operated when stopping the right reel. The lighting of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534 is controlled by the sub-control means (sub-control board), but may be controlled by the main control means (main control board).

The stop switch panel 540 is composed of a plate-like member having a circular opening in a portion corresponding to the stop switches 510, 520, 530, and covers the front surface of the stop switch unit 500 (the area around each stop switch 510, 520, 530). ) is placed so as to cover it. The stop switch panel 540 is made of, for example, a material that is non-transparent or has low translucency, and is painted in a predetermined color (for example, purple, but may be a different color). Note that the stop switch panel 540 may be made of a translucent material, and a lamp (also referred to as a "panel lamp") that is lit so as to be visible through the stop switch panel 540 may be arranged on the back side thereof.

As described above, the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534 are configured so that they can be lit in different lighting modes or colors depending on the game status, game progress, and the like. In this embodiment, the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534 are configured to have different lighting modes and colors depending on whether the slot machine of the second embodiment is in a normal state or in an abnormal state. Note that the abnormal state here is not an error state in which the game cannot proceed normally, but rather an error state in which the game can be played but is not in a predetermined state (for example, the optimal or most optimal state for playing the game). Refers to a state where the setting value is not set to an advantageous setting value, a state where the probability of awarding the game value is highest according to the design, etc.). On the other hand, the normal state refers to a state where the game is set to a predetermined state and the game can proceed normally.

For example, at a game parlor, setting values and gaming conditions may be set to a predetermined state, but the predetermined state may not be set due to forgetting to set the settings or the like. Therefore, it is preferable to be able to notify the game store clerk whether or not the game is in an abnormal state such as not being set to a predetermined state. On the other hand, since the game can be played normally even in such an abnormal state, there is little need to notify the player of the abnormal state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 is changed depending on whether the state is normal or abnormal, so that the game store staff can determine whether or not the state is abnormal. The notification is made in such a way that it is easy to understand and difficult for the player to notice (do not feel strange).

<Lighting mode and color of stop switch lamp>
64 to 67 show examples of changes in each lighting pattern (lighting mode and lighting color) of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534, and these will be explained below in order. Note that in FIGS. 64 to 67, the left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch refer to stop switches 510, 520, and 530, respectively. Furthermore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp refer to the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534, respectively.

FIG. 64 shows an example of how the lighting pattern changes in normal state 1. The normal state 1 is an internal and non-AT gaming state, and refers to the state when the pushing combination is won. The internal gaming state refers to a gaming state in which the winning of the special combination is carried over, such as the BB internal gaming state described in the first embodiment, and for example, gaming mode 7 in the first embodiment corresponds to this. do. Since the normal state 1 is non-AT, even if the push order combination is won, the push order is not announced (push navigation). Here, it is assumed that each stop switch is operated in the order of left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch.

In the example of the change in lighting pattern in normal state 1 in Figure 64, until the start lever is operated and all reels rotate at a constant speed (the time when each stop switch operation can be accepted), the left stop switch lamp, middle The stop switch lamp and right stop switch lamp both light red. Then, when all the reels rotate at a constant speed, from that point on, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp all switch from lighting in red to lighting in blue. Thereafter, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp changes from lighting in blue to lighting in red from that point (the point in time when the left stop switch is switched from OFF to ON).

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp changes from lighting in blue to lighting in red from that point (the point in time when the middle stop switch is switched from OFF to ON). Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp changes from lighting in blue to lighting in red from that point (the point in time when the right stop switch is switched from OFF to ON). Note that although the case where the left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch are operated in this order is taken as an example, the way the lighting pattern changes when operated in any other order is also based on this example. Become.

FIG. 65 shows an example of how the lighting pattern changes in normal state 2. The normal state 2 is a gaming state in which the player is in the internal state and in the AT state, and refers to the state when the pushing combination is won. Since the normal state 1 is during AT, when the push order combination is won, the push order is announced (push navigation). Here, it is assumed that the pressing order of "left middle right" is notified, and each stop switch is operated in accordance with the notified pressing order.

In the example of the change in lighting pattern in normal state 2 in Figure 65, until the start lever is operated and all the reels rotate at a constant speed, as in normal state 1, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, right stop switch lamp, Both stop switch lamps light up red. Then, when all the reels rotate at a constant speed, from that point on, the left stop switch lamp changes from red lighting to white blinking, and both the middle stop switch lamp and right stop switch lamp switch from red lighting to white lighting. By blinking the left stop switch lamp in white, the player can be prompted to operate the left stop switch. Thereafter, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the left stop switch lamp switches from flashing white to off, and the middle stop switch lamp switches from lighting red to flashing white. By blinking the middle stop switch lamp in white, the player can be prompted to operate the middle stop switch.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the middle stop switch lamp switches from blinking white to off, and the right stop switch lamp switches from lit white to blinking white. By blinking the right stop switch lamp in white, the player can be prompted to operate the right stop switch. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the right stop switch lamp switches from flashing white to lit red, and both the left stop switch lamp and the middle stop switch lamp switch from off to lit red. Note that this example assumes that the press order of "left center right" is notified and each stop switch is operated according to the notified press order, but if another press order is notified and the notified press order is According to the pressing order, the lighting pattern changes when each stop switch is operated in accordance with this example.

FIG. 66 shows an example of how the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 1. Abnormal state 1 is a non-internal and non-AT gaming state, and refers to the state when the pushing combination is won. The non-internal gaming state refers to a gaming state in which the winning of the special winning role has not been carried over, a gaming state in which the special winning role has not been won, or a gaming state in which a bonus game is played due to the establishment of the special winning role, such as the gaming mode in the first embodiment. 4 corresponds to this. The reason why the abnormal state 1 is determined to be an abnormal state is because, for example, the game state that should have been set to the internal gaming state is set to the non-internal gaming state. Since abnormal state 1 is non-AT, even if the push order winning combination is won, the push order is not announced (push navigation). Here, it is assumed that the stop switches are operated in the order of the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp.

In the example of the change in lighting pattern in abnormal state 1 in Figure 66, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp do not light up in red until the start lever is operated and all reels rotate at a constant speed. All lights go out. Then, when all the reels rotate at a constant speed, from that point on, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp all switch from off to lit in blue. Thereafter, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the left stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to turning off without lighting in red.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the middle stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to turning off. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the right stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to turning off. Note that although the case where the left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch are operated in this order is taken as an example, the way the lighting pattern changes when operated in any other order is also based on this example. Become.

In abnormal state 1, the lighting pattern changes in this way. The way the lighting pattern changes is different from the way the lighting pattern changes in normal state 1 and normal state 2. However, a game store clerk who is familiar with the way the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 1 can easily recognize (identify) such a change, but a player who is not familiar with it can Difficult to recognize. Furthermore, even if the user sees how the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 1, it is unlikely to cause a sense of discomfort. This means, for example, that the lighting pattern (lighting color) of the stop switch when it is ready to accept operations is the same in normal state 1 and abnormal state 1 (lights blue in both cases). is a factor. By setting the way the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 1 as described above, it becomes possible to notify that abnormal state 1 is present in a manner that is easy for game store staff to understand and difficult for players to notice.

FIG. 67 shows an example of how the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 2. Abnormal state 2 is a gaming state during non-AT, and refers to a state when the pushing combination is won and settings need to be changed. It does not matter whether it is non-internal or internal. The abnormal state 2 is determined to be an abnormal state because, for example, a predetermined setting value is set to a different setting value. Since abnormal state 2 is non-AT, even if the push order combination is won, the push order is not announced (press navigation). Here, it is assumed that the stop switches are operated in the order of the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp.

In the example of the change in lighting pattern in abnormal state 2 in Figure 67, until the start lever is operated and all reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp are all light blue. Light. Then, when all the reels rotate at a constant speed, from that point on, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp all switch from lighting in light blue to lighting in blue. Thereafter, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the left stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to lighting in light blue.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the middle stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to lighting in light blue. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, from that point on, the right stop switch lamp changes from lighting in blue to lighting in light blue. Note that although this example uses the case where the left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch are operated in this order, the way the lighting pattern changes when operated in any other order is also similar to this example. Become.

In abnormal state 2, the lighting pattern changes in this way. The way the lighting pattern changes is different from the way the lighting pattern changes in normal state 1 and abnormal state 1. However, a game store clerk who is familiar with the way the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 2 can easily recognize (identify) such a change, but a player who is not familiar with it can Difficult to recognize. Moreover, even if the user sees how the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 2, it is unlikely to cause a sense of discomfort. This means, for example, that the lighting pattern (lighting color) of the stop switch when it is ready for operation is the same in normal state 1, abnormal state 1, and abnormal state 2. (both light up in blue) is the cause. By setting the way the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 2 as described above, it becomes possible to notify that abnormal state 2 is present in a manner that is easy for game store staff to understand and difficult for players to notice.

As described above, the stop switch panel 540 is painted with a predetermined color. In this embodiment, the colors applied to the stop switch panel 540 include the lighting colors used in the stop switch lamps (the color seen through the stop switch cover 512 and the color seen when the stop switch lamp is directly seen). In the above example, the color (for example, black) is different from the same or similar colors (red, blue, white, light blue). This prevents the color of the stop switch panel 540 from interfering with the visibility of the lighting color of the stop switch lamp, making it possible to clearly see the lighting color of the stop switch lamp. In addition, when the stop switch panel 540 is made of a translucent material and a panel lamp is arranged on the back side, the lighting color of the panel lamp (the color visually recognized through the stop switch panel 540) is different from each stop switch panel 540. It is preferable that the lighting color is different from a color that is the same as or similar to the lighting color used in the switch lamp. This prevents the lighting color of the panel lamp from interfering with the visibility of the lighting color of the stop switch lamp, and makes it possible to visually recognize the lighting color of the stop switch lamp.

In this embodiment, the stop switch lamp is used to notify whether the state is normal or abnormal, but other lighting devices may be used to notify. For example, a decorative lighting device placed on the frame or panel of the front door may also be used as a lighting device to notify abnormal conditions, or a separate lighting device may be provided specifically for notifying abnormal conditions. You can.

《Third Embodiment》
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to a third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a "third form slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. Below, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the third embodiment will be mainly explained. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to application to the slot machine of the third embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. Note that the slot machine of the third embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described for the slot machine 1 can be applied to the third embodiment of the slot machine in the same manner or with some changes in the process contents. The characteristic structure of the slot machine of the second form described above can also be applied to the slot machine of the third form in the same way or with some changes in content.

<AT notification display>
The slot machine of the third form includes an AT notification display 600, as shown in FIG. The AT notification display 600 includes three 7-segment displays 611, 612, and 613 capable of displaying one-digit numbers, alphabetic characters, and the like. The 7-segment displays 611, 612, and 613, as shown in FIG. (A 7-segment display with such a configuration is also called an 8-segment display.) . As shown in FIG. 68(C), the A-segment LED to H-segment LED are in a lit state (indicated by black in the figure), a blinking state (indicated by diagonal lines in the figure), and an unlit state (indicated by white in the figure) It is configured so that it can be switched between.

The AT notification display 600 is arranged in a predetermined area on the front side of the slot machine of the third embodiment (for example, an area corresponding to the symbol display area DA1 and the symbol display area DA2 in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment). (The location may be changed as appropriate.) The AT notification display 600 displays the push navigation (press order) and the remaining number of AT payouts in the gaming state during AT (corresponding to gaming mode 3 described in the first embodiment, for example). It is configured so that it can be performed while switching depending on the progress of the process. The AT remaining payout number refers to the number of gaming values (gaming medals) that can be awarded during the remaining AT period (from the current time during AT until the end of one or a series of ATs. AT notification display) 600 is controlled by a sub-control means (sub-control board), but may be controlled by a main control means (main control board).

The push navigation notification by the AT notification display 600 shows the numbers (any number from 1 to 3) of the push order corresponding to the left reel, middle reel, and right reel on the 7-segment displays 611, 612, and 613, respectively. This is done by displaying the For example, to notify the pressing order of "middle right left", display "2" on the 7-segment display 611, "1" on the 7-segment display, "3" on the 7-segment display 613, and display "3" on the 7-segment display 611, When notifying the pressing order of "Left", "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display 611, "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 612, and "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 613.

On the other hand, the AT notification display 600 notifies the number of AT remaining payouts by displaying the hundreds digit on the left 7-segment display 611, displaying the tens digit on the central 7-segment display 612, This is done by displaying the ones digit on the seven segment display 613 on the right side. For example, to notify "258" as the remaining AT payout number, "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 611, "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display, "8" is displayed on the 7-segment display 613, and "37" is displayed on the 7-segment display 611. ”, the 7-segment display 611 turns off and does not display anything, and the 7-segment display 612 displays “3” and the 7-segment display 613 displays “7”.

<Example of switching information display on AT notification display>
Using FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, we will explain how the display of the push order and the display of the remaining AT payout number are switched on the AT notification display 600 according to the progress of the game during the AT gaming state. explain. FIG. 69 shows an example of the flow of progress of one game during the AT gaming state and the operation contents of the AT notification display 600 according to the progress status, and FIG. 70 shows an example of the AT notification display according to the progress status of the game An example of what is displayed on the display 600 is shown. The "lever", "first stop", "second stop", "third stop", and "payout" written on the left side of these figures indicate each point in the progress of one game. There is. <Lever> refers to the timing when the start lever operation is accepted, and <1st stop> refers to the timing when the stop operation (first stop operation) for any one of the three rotating reels is accepted. It shows. Similarly, the "second stop" indicates the timing when a stop operation (second stop operation) for any one of the remaining two rotating reels is accepted, and the "third stop" refers to the timing when the stop operation (second stop operation) for any one of the remaining two rotating reels is accepted. This shows the timing at which the stop operation (third stop operation) for the remaining one reel is accepted. Furthermore, "payout" indicates the timing at which the award of game value (game medals) starts. Hereinafter, the 7-segment displays 611, 612, and 613 are also referred to as a left 7-segment display, a middle 7-segment display, and a right 7-segment display, respectively.

As shown in step SL1 in FIG. 69, at the time when the operation of the start lever is accepted, the value of the remaining AT payout number (here, 400 coins) is displayed on the AT notification display. Here, the remaining AT payout number is 400 coins, so the AT notification display shows "400" (the left 7-segment display shows "4", and the middle 7-segment display shows "0"), as shown in (A1) of Figure 70. , "0") is displayed on the right 7-segment display. Next, in step SL2 of FIG. 69, a push order navigation is generated due to the winning of the push order combination. Thereby, in step SL3, the display on the AT notification display is switched from "400", which is the number of AT remaining payouts, to the lever-triggered push navigation (the push navigation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation). . Here, the lever-triggered push navigation is set to "left center right." Since the push navigation is "left center right", as shown in (A2) in Figure 70, "123" is displayed on the AT notification display ("1" is displayed on the left 7 segment display, "2" is displayed on the middle 7 segment display, Display "3" on the right 7-segment display.However, the number corresponding to the first reel that should be stopped (in this case, "1" displayed on the left 7-segment display) is blinked, and the number corresponding to the reel that should be stopped on the second The numerical value corresponding to the reel (here, "2" displayed on the middle 7 segment display) and the numerical value corresponding to the third reel to be stopped (here, "3" displayed on the right 7 segment display) are lit. By flashing the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped first, it is possible to confirm that the displayed numerical value is not the AT remaining payout number "123" but the pressing order of "left middle right" and the first stopping operation. It becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the reel to be played is the left reel corresponding to the left 7-segment display displaying blinking "1".

Next, in response to the reception of the first stop operation, in step SL4 of FIG. 69, it is determined whether the first stop operation has been performed according to the push navigation. Here, if the first stop operation is performed according to the push navigation, in step SL5, the display on the AT notification display is changed from the push navigation triggered by the lever to the push navigation triggered by the first stop (from the second stop operation to the third stop operation). Switch to the display (push navigation to the operation). That is, as shown in (A3) of FIG. 70, the left 7-segment display of the AT notification display is turned off, the middle 7-segment display displays "2", and the right 7-segment display displays "3". However, the number corresponding to the second reel to be stopped (here, "2" displayed on the middle 7 segment display) is blinking, and the number corresponding to the third reel to be stopped (here, "2" displayed on the right 7 segment display) is blinking. "3" displayed on the screen is lit. By flashing the numerical value corresponding to the reel that should be stopped second, you can confirm that the displayed numerical value is not the AT remaining payout number "23" but the pressing order of "middle right" and that the second stop operation should be performed. It becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the reel is the middle reel corresponding to the middle 7 segment display displaying "2" blinking.

Next, in response to the acceptance of the second stop operation, in step SL6 of FIG. 69, it is determined whether the second stop operation has been performed according to the push navigation. Here, if the second stop operation is performed according to the push navigation, in step SL7, the display on the AT notification display is changed from the push navigation of the first stop trigger to the push navigation of the second stop trigger (the push navigation of the third stop operation). Navigation) display. That is, as shown in (A4) of FIG. 70, the middle 7-segment display of the AT notification display is turned off (the left segment display remains off), and "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. However, the numerical value (here, "3" displayed on the right 7-segment display) corresponding to the third reel to be stopped is blinked. By flashing the numerical value corresponding to the third reel that should be stopped, it is possible to confirm that the displayed numerical value is not the AT remaining payout number "3" but the pressing order of "right", and the third reel that should be stopped. However, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the right reel corresponds to the right 7-segment display displaying "3" blinking.

Next, with the acceptance of the third stop operation as a trigger, in step SL8 of FIG. 69, the display on the AT notification display shows the AT remaining payout before subtraction (before the payout is made) from the push navigation of the third stop trigger. Switch to display numbers. That is, as shown in (A5) of FIG. 70, "400" is displayed on the AT notification display ("4" is displayed on the left 7-segment display, "0" is displayed on the middle 7-segment display, and "0" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. ) lights up. Then, when the game medals are paid out, in step SL9 of FIG. 69, the AT notification display decrements the value after subtraction (after the end of payout) from the value before subtraction of the AT remaining payout number. That is, as shown in (A6) and (A7) of FIG. 70, "400" before subtraction displayed on the AT notification display is changed to "399", "398", "397", ... "391", While updating the display to ``390'' and subtracting it by 1, the subtracted ``389'' is displayed (``3'' is displayed on the left 7-segment display, ``8'' is displayed on the middle 7-segment display, and ``9'' is displayed on the right 7-segment display. ”) is displayed. However, in this example, the number of payouts is "11". By performing such a decrement display, it is possible for the player to feel that game medals are paid out one by one, and the AT remaining payout number decreases by one as the game medals are paid out.

On the other hand, in step SL4 of FIG. 69, if it is determined that the first stop operation was not performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification display is switched from the lever-triggered push navigation to the display of the AT remaining payout number after subtraction. (displays immediately without decrementing). That is, as shown in (A8) of FIG. 70, immediately after the first stop, "389" appears on the AT notification display ("3" appears on the left 7-segment display, and "8" appears on the middle 7-segment display). , "9") is displayed on the right 7-segment display. Similarly, in step SL6 of FIG. 69, if it is determined that the second stop operation has not been performed according to the push navigation, the AT notification display will display the AT remaining payout number after subtraction from the push navigation of the first stop trigger. Switch to display and display immediately. That is, as shown in (A9) of FIG. 70, "389" is displayed on the AT notification display immediately after the first stop is performed. In this way, if the stop operation is performed without following the push navigation, the display of the push navigation is stopped and the remaining AT payout number is displayed, and the AT remaining payout number after subtraction is immediately displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that he performed the stop operation without following the navigation and that the number of AT remaining payouts has decreased as a result. Also, before all reels stop (before the stopped symbols are confirmed), the AT remaining number of payouts after subtraction is displayed, so the payout will be made when the stopped symbols are confirmed, and the AT remaining number of payouts will be subtracted accordingly. It is also possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the information has been displayed.

As a specific example, the control contents of the display on the AT notification display when a winning combination lottery result corresponding to the winning-A1 condition device (see FIG. 8) in the first embodiment is obtained will be explained. Winning-A1 condition device: If the pressing order is correct, a small bell win is established and a predetermined number of game medals (15 in the first embodiment, but 11 in this embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, even if the pressing order is incorrect, a 1-card winning combination may be established and one game medal may be paid out. When such a pressing order winning combination is won, as described above, when it is confirmed that the pressing order is incorrect, the display on the AT notification display is switched to the display of the AT remaining payout number after subtraction from the pressing navigation, and immediately Display (“400” → “389”). Thereafter, even if a one-coin combination is established and only one game medal is paid out, the display content of the AT remaining payout number is not updated. In other words, the value "399" (=400-1) is obtained by subtracting the actual number of coins paid out "1" from the displayed AT remaining payout number "389" after the subtraction from the AT remaining payout number "400" before the subtraction. will not be updated. On the other hand, if a 1-card hand is established due to an incorrect push order, and the display of the AT remaining payout number after the subtraction is updated to "399", the player will intentionally make a 1-card win by assuming an incorrect push order. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of AT remaining payouts and to make the AT gaming state continue for a long time. Therefore, even if the push navigation is performed, if the push order is incorrect, the AT remaining payout number will be uniformly subtracted by "11" regardless of whether or not a one-card hand is formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the period of the AT gaming state from being extended.

<Information display on AT notification display when power is restored>
The information displayed on the AT notification display 600 in the progress of the game and its display mode are managed by the sub-control means. When the power is cut off during the progress of the game, the sub-control means stores the information that was being displayed or was about to be displayed on the AT notification display 600 at that time, and displays it again when the power is restored from the power cut. Hereinafter, how the push order and the remaining AT payout number are displayed on the AT notification display 600 at the time of power-off recovery will be explained using FIG. 71. FIG. 71 shows an example of the display contents of the AT notification display 600 according to the timing of power-off and power-off recovery. It is assumed that the content displayed on the AT notification display 600 according to the progress of the game when the power supply has not been cut off is the same as the content shown in FIG. 70.

If a power outage occurs after the start lever operation is accepted and before the first stop operation is accepted, and the power is restored, the AT notification will be sent as shown in FIG. 71(A). The above-mentioned lever-triggered push navigation is displayed on the display. If a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is accepted but before the second stop operation is accepted, and the power is restored, whether or not the first stop operation was consistent with the push navigation. The displayed content differs depending on the That is, if the first stop operation coincides with the push navigation, as shown in (B1) of FIG. 71, the push navigation of the above-mentioned first stop trigger is displayed on the AT notification display. On the other hand, if the first stop operation does not match the push navigation, as shown in (B2) of FIG. 71, the remaining AT payout number after the above-mentioned subtraction is displayed on the AT notification display.

If a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is accepted but before the third stop operation is accepted, and the power is restored, the order of the stop operations up to that point (first stop operation and The displayed contents differ depending on whether or not the second stop operation) matches the push navigation. That is, if the order of the previous stop operations matches the push navigation, as shown in (C1) of FIG. 71, the push navigation of the second stop trigger is displayed on the AT notification display. On the other hand, if the order of the stop operations up to that point does not match the push navigation, the remaining AT payout number after the above-mentioned subtraction is displayed on the AT notification display as shown in (C2) of FIG. 71.

If a power outage occurs after the third stop operation is accepted and before the game medals are paid out, and the power is restored, the order of the stop operations up to that point (from the first stop operation to The displayed contents differ depending on whether or not the third stop operation) matches the push navigation. That is, if the order of the stop operations so far matches the push navigation, the remaining AT payout number before subtraction is displayed on the AT notification display as shown in (D1) of FIG. 71. Then, in response to the subsequent payout of game medals, the above-mentioned decrement display is performed. On the other hand, if the order of the stop operations up to that point does not match the push navigation, as shown in (C2) of FIG. 71, the remaining AT payout number after the above-mentioned subtraction is displayed on the AT notification display.

If a power outage occurs while the game medals are being paid out and the power is restored, the AT notification display will display the number of AT remaining payouts after subtraction, as shown in (E) of FIG. Display immediately. When recovering from a power failure, the recovery time on the main control means side and the recovery time on the sub control means side may be different. Therefore, if a power outage occurs while the game medals are being paid out, the main control unit will return first, restart the payout, and end the process even though the secondary control unit is not yet ready for recovery. Sometimes. In this case, if the above-mentioned decrement display is performed after the sub-control means side has completed its return, there is a risk that the player who sees this may mistakenly believe that the payout is continuing at that point. Therefore, by providing an immediate display instead of a decrement display, such misunderstandings by players are avoided.

As described above, the AT notification display 600 is capable of switching and displaying a plurality of different pieces of information, including press order information and AT remaining payout number information, for notification. Therefore, compared to the case where each piece of information is displayed on a separate display, the space required for displaying the display can be reduced, and space can be saved. Further, by using the display unit as a display unit, it is also possible to reduce manufacturing costs. Further, the AT notification display 600 changes the display mode of information depending on whether the push order is notified or the remaining AT payout number. Therefore, it becomes clear to the player which information is being displayed, and it is also possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the displayed information and causing problems in the game. For example, even if the number of AT remaining payouts before or after the subtraction is displayed, such as "321," "213," or "123," which is used in the push navigation display, the blinking display will be performed during the push navigation. By not having this, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking it as a push navigation.

Note that the AT notification display 600 can display two types of information with different contents even if they are similar numerical information, but it may be configured to display three or more types of information. . Even in this case, if the information to be displayed includes a plurality of pieces of information that are likely to be confused, it is preferable to change the display mode of the information. Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned push navigation and the remaining AT payout number, the information can include the AT add-on number. The push navigation flashes some information, but when announcing the number of AT additions, it is necessary to change the color and brightness of the notification, change the lighting mode of the segment lamp that is different from the corresponding segment, or use the voice The mode of notification may be changed. This allows the player to specifically (clearly) specify the current notification content. Further, in this embodiment, information is notified by the AT notification display 600 using a 7-segment display, but a plurality of different pieces of information may be notified using another type of display such as a dot matrix LED. It may be configured to display the information. Further, a plurality of different pieces of information may be displayed in the same display area on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device. Even in these cases, when the information to be displayed includes a plurality of pieces of information that are likely to be confused, it is preferable to change the display mode of the information. Furthermore, misidentification of information may be prevented by changing the lighting color, the form of displayed characters, etc., among a plurality of pieces of information that are likely to be confused.

《Fourth embodiment》
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a "fourth embodiment slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. Below, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the fourth embodiment will be mainly explained. The characteristic portions described below are not limited to application to the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. Note that the slot machine of the fourth embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described for the slot machine 1 can be applied to the fourth embodiment of the slot machine in the same manner or with some changes in the process contents. The characteristic configurations of the slot machines of the second and third forms described above can also be applied to the slot machine of the fourth form in the same way or with some changes in content.

<Transition of gaming state>
In the slot machine of the fourth form, as shown in FIG. 72, to simplify the description, a gaming state (main gaming state) mainly related to the setting state of AT, which is controlled by the main control means, is a normal game state within an advantageous section. It has four gaming states: a gaming state, an AT gaming state, and a pullback gaming state. The non-advantageous section gaming state is a gaming state belonging to a non-advantageous section (corresponding to the normal section described in the first embodiment), and corresponds to gaming mode 0 described in the first embodiment. The normal gaming state, AT gaming state, and pullback gaming state within the advantageous section are gaming states that belong to the advantageous section (similar to the advantageous section described in the first embodiment). The normal game state within the advantageous section corresponds to, for example, game modes 1, 2, and 6 explained in the first embodiment, the AT game state corresponds to, for example, game mode 3, and the pullback game state corresponds to, for example, game mode 4, 5. , 7.

If a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while staying in the non-advantageous section gaming state, the game shifts to the advantageous section (basically the normal gaming state within the advantageous section). In the normal game state within the advantageous section, an AT lottery (details will be described later) and a charge lottery are carried out on the main control means side based on the winning combination results and the like. If you win the AT lottery (AT win), you will be transferred to an AT gaming state using this as an opportunity. If you win the charge lottery, the number of charges (also referred to as "AT stock number") will be added. The number of charges is related to the number of games set in the AT gaming state, and the larger the number of charges, the higher the possibility that the number of resets of the AT gaming state will increase, which is advantageous for the player. In the AT gaming state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) is set as one set, and the push navigation is executed when the push order winning combination is won. In addition, in the AT gaming state, a charge cancellation lottery is performed on the main control means side based on the winning combination result and the like. If you win the charge cancellation lottery, the remaining number of games in the currently set AT gaming state will be used up, and then the AT gaming state will be reset for the predetermined number of games (the number of charges will be subtracted by 1 when resetting). . In addition, as another aspect, if a charge release lottery is won in the AT gaming state, the AT gaming state is reset for a predetermined number of games from the next game, regardless of the number of remaining games in the currently set AT gaming state. Alternatively, the AT gaming state may be continued by adding a predetermined number of games to the remaining number of games in the currently set AT gaming state. If the set number of games is exhausted in the AT gaming state and the AT gaming state is not reset, the game is shifted to the pullback gaming state. In the pull-back gaming state, a pull-back lottery is held, and when the player wins the pull-back lottery, the game is shifted to the AT gaming state. Further, when the number of charges is 1 or more, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games) are played in the pullback gaming state without winning the pullback lottery, the AT gaming state may be entered. In that case, the number of charges is subtracted by 1 when transitioning to the AT gaming state.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an advantageous section clear counter is provided to keep track of the number of games that are consecutively staying in the advantageous section, and when the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is cleared. Set the counter value to "1500". Each time the game is played in an advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches "0", the game is forcibly shifted to the normal section. Also, if you want to transition from an advantageous section to a normal section before the value of the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", clear the value of the advantageous section clear counter (set it to "0"), and then switch from the normal section to the advantageous section again. , the value of the advantageous section clear counter is reset to "1500".

It also includes a MY counter that counts the number of game medals acquired (difference number) during the advantageous period. This MY counter sets the counter value to "0" at the start of the advantageous section (it may also be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous section), and thereafter changes the counter value in accordance with the result of each game. Update. When updating, if the difference in number of sheets is less than 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference in number of sheets is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as is (please do not perform such correction. good). Then, when the accumulated differential number of sheets exceeds 2400 sheets, the advantageous section ends and the game shifts to a non-advantageous section (non-advantageous section gaming state). Note that this MY counter is functionally similar to the net increase counter of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, an AT number counter is also provided as a counter for counting the number of game medals acquired (difference number) during the advantageous period. This AT number counter is calculated by taking into account the value of the MY counter and the number of AT stocks (number of charges), etc., and is the acquisition of game medals that are expected to be acquired during one advantageous period. This is a counter that counts the number (expected number of acquisitions, expected number of acquisitions possible). When the value of the AT coin counter (expected number of acquisitions) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), the advantageous section is ended at a predetermined timing (for example, the end timing of the ending game state described later) and the It is designed so that there may be a shift to an advantageous area. Note that this AT number counter is functionally similar to the correction counter of the first embodiment. These advantageous section clear counter, MY counter, and AT number counter are controlled and managed by the main control means.

If you win the charge lottery and the number of charges is updated during the normal gaming state within the advantageous section, a performance suggesting that the number of charges has been updated (added) (also referred to as a "charge suggestion performance") will be displayed in the secondary control. It may be carried out by means. Whether or not to execute the charge suggestion performance is determined by a charge suggestion occurrence lottery. This charge suggestion generation lottery is performed by the sub-control means based on the winning combination result in the game in which the number of charges has been updated, the updated number of charges, and the charge suggestion mode (details will be described later). The charge suggestion mode is a mode related to the expectation level (probability) that a charge suggestion performance will be performed, and is set to charge suggestion mode=1, 2, or 3 (the higher the mode number, the higher the expectation level). Which charge suggestion mode is set is determined by a charge suggestion mode lottery. This charge suggestion mode lottery is carried out, for example, at a predetermined timing in the game when the game transitions from an advantageous section (the This is performed by the sub-control means, triggered by any timing from management total stop processing to advantageous section clear counter processing. Then, the charge suggestion mode selected by the charge suggestion mode lottery is set to the normal gaming state ((X+1)th advantageous section within the advantageous section of the advantageous section ((X+1)th advantageous section) to which the charge suggestion mode is transferred after passing through this non-advantageous section gaming state. This affects the probability that a charging suggestion effect will occur in the normal game state within the section (details will be described later). Note that the charge suggestion mode set at the end of the X-th advantageous section is maintained in the (X+1)th advantageous section. Then, at the end of the (X+1)th advantageous section, a new charge suggestion mode is set by a charge suggestion mode lottery.

As a performance similar to the charging suggestion performance, a performance suggesting the current setting value of the gaming machine (also referred to as a "setting value suggestion performance") may be performed. When performing such a setting value suggestion effect, the probability that the setting value suggestion effect will be performed and the accuracy of the suggested contents should be set so that they change depending on the charge suggestion mode (another suggestion mode may be set). You can. For example, the higher the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the accuracy of the suggestion content, and the higher the probability that a setting value suggestion effect will be performed, or conversely, the smaller the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the accuracy of the suggestion content, the setting value suggestion. The probability that the performance will be performed may be set high. In addition, the higher the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the probability that setting value suggestion performances will be performed, including those with low and high suggestion content accuracy, but it is limited to setting value suggestion performances with high suggestion content accuracy. The lower the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the probability that the charge suggestion mode will be performed.Conversely, the smaller the charge suggestion mode number is, the higher the probability that the set value suggestion effect will be performed, including the lower and higher accuracy of the suggestion content. Although the charge suggestion mode number is set high, the higher the number of the charge suggestion mode, the higher the probability of the suggestion performance limited to the setting value suggestion performance where the suggestion content is highly accurate.

Hereinafter, the AT lottery performed by the main control means, the charge suggestion mode lottery and the charge suggestion generation lottery performed by the sub-control means will be explained using specific examples. In the charge suggestion mode lottery shown in FIG. 73(A), the probability of winning is different depending on whether the target difference number is more than a predetermined number (in this example, "1000" but can be changed as appropriate) or less than a predetermined number. It is set. The target differential number of coins refers to the differential number of coins obtained at a predetermined time point in an advantageous section when one advantageous section ends. The predetermined point in time is, for example, the point at which the advantageous section ends, the point at which the AT gaming state ends if the AT gaming state is set only once in the advantageous section, or the point at which the AT gaming state ends multiple times in the advantageous section. If this is set, it can be set as appropriate, such as when the last AT gaming state ends or when the difference in number of coins in the advantageous section reaches its maximum.

In the charge suggestion mode lottery, one of selection number 1 (charge suggestion mode = 1 set), selection number 2 (charge suggestion mode = 2 set), selection number 3 (charge suggestion mode = 3 set) is selected. Ru. The numbers assigned to each selection number are as shown in FIG. 73(A). In addition, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, the total value of the entered numbers is set to "16384". In this way, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, if the target difference number in the current advantageous section is 1000 or more, the probability of setting the charge suggestion mode = 1 is lower, and the probability of setting the charge suggestion mode = 3 is lower. It is set to be high. The charge suggestion mode (selected number) set based on the result of the charge suggestion mode lottery is configured to be stored in the sub-control means without being cleared even after the end of the advantageous section, and held even in the next advantageous section. The target differential number of sheets is cleared in the main control means when the advantageous section ends, but the sub-control means is configured so that it is not cleared but is stored even after the advantageous section ends and is held in the next advantageous section. You may.

In the AT lottery shown in FIG. 73(B), the probability of winning is set to vary depending on the trigger role and the number of charges selected based on the role determination result. Trigger win 1 and trigger win 2 in the figure correspond to, for example, a so-called rare win (watermelon minor win in the first embodiment), and can be set arbitrarily. Further, in the figure, the number of charges = 1 to 4 is shown, but the number of charges = 5 or more may also be set. In the AT lottery, either selection number 0 (AT non-selection) or selection number 1 (AT selection) is selected. The numbers assigned to each selection number are as shown in FIG. 73(B). In addition, in the AT lottery, the total value of the numbers is set to "65536". In this way, in the AT lottery, basically the probability of AT winning increases as the number of charges increases, but when the number of charges = 0, the probability of winning AT is set higher than when the number of charges = 1 or 2. ing. Further, when the number of charges is a certain number (number of charges = 3 in the figure), the probability of AT winning is set to be quite high.

In the charge suggestion generation lottery shown in FIG. 74, the probability of winning is set to vary depending on the value of the updated charge suggestion mode, the winning combination selected based on the winning combination determination result, and the number of charges. In this example, the trigger role is divided into 1 and other roles, but more trigger roles may be set. Furthermore, the probability of winning may be changed between trigger role 1 and other roles. Furthermore, although the number of charges = 1 to 4 is shown in the figure, the number of charges = 5 or more may also be set. In the charging suggestion occurrence lottery, either selection number 0 (no suggestion) or selection number 1 (with suggestion) is selected. The numbers assigned to each selection number are as shown in FIGS. 74(A) to 74(C). In addition, in the charging suggestion generation lottery, the total value of the numbers is set to "16384". In this way, in the charge suggestion generation lottery, basically, the value of the charge suggestion mode increases, and the larger the number of charges, the higher the probability that the charge suggestion performance will be performed. In particular, when the number of charges is a specific number (in this example, the number of charges = 3), the probability that the charge suggestion effect will be performed is set to be quite high.

By setting the lottery probability for each lottery as described above, the following effects can be obtained. First, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, there is a high probability that charge suggestion mode=3 will be set when the target difference number is 1000 or more. When the charge suggestion mode is set to 3, the probability of winning in the charge suggestion occurrence lottery increases, so the possibility that a charge suggestion performance will be performed when the number of charges is updated also increases. Players with a target differential number of 1000 or more, that is, players who are given a large amount of gaming value, are generally highly motivated to continue playing the game. Therefore, when the charge suggestion effect is performed, it is known that the number of charges is 1 or more, and it can be expected that this will further increase the player's desire to continue playing the game. It should be noted that even if a player obtains a target differential number of 1000 or more, some players are satisfied with the result and try to stop playing the game. Even for such players, it can be expected that the charge suggestion performance will increase their desire to continue playing the game. On the other hand, if the charging suggestion performance is not performed even if the game continues for a while after the end of the advantageous section, there is a high possibility that the number of charging is 0. However, when the number of charges = 0, the probability of AT winning is high, so it can be expected that the player will be more motivated to continue playing the game in anticipation of AT winning. Note that when the number of charges is updated to 3, which makes the probability of AT winning extremely high, the probability that the charge suggestion performance will be performed also increases. Therefore, the presentation mode of the charge suggestion presentation that is performed when the number of charges is updated to 3 may be set to a presentation mode that is unique to the case where the number of charges is 3. By doing so, it is expected that players who see the charge suggestion performance with a unique performance style will further increase their motivation to continue playing the game, considering that there are multiple charges and it is easy to win AT. can.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned drawings, the probability of winning may be set in consideration of other conditions. For example, the lottery probability of the AT lottery performed by the main control means or the charge suggestion generation lottery performed by the sub-control means may be set according to the performance group number and the condition device group number managed by the main control means. In addition, a flag for managing the ease of winning in the charge lottery (also referred to as a "charge winning probability flag") is set in the main control means, and the state of this charge winning probability flag (for example, flag = 0: Depending on the low probability state (1: high probability state), the lottery probability of the AT lottery performed by the main control means and the charge suggestion generation lottery performed by the sub control means may be set.

<Ending game state>
In the slot machine of the fourth type, when a predetermined condition (also referred to as an "ending condition") is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the slot machine uses this as an opportunity to shift to a special gaming state (also referred to as an "ending gaming state"). An example of transition from such an AT gaming state to an ending gaming state is shown in FIG. In FIG. 75, the ending condition is met when the AT game state set at 20G ("G" means game) has 12G remaining (when 8G is used up after setting), and the ending condition starts from the next game. An example is shown in which the game state is set. Note that the ending conditions include, for example, that the above-mentioned AT coin counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, "2100"), or that the number of games played after moving to the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (for example, 1300). can do.

On the other hand, during the AT gaming state, the sub-control means executes a performance (also referred to as "AT suggestion performance") corresponding to the AT gaming state. The state in which this AT suggestion performance is executed is hereinafter referred to as the "AT suggestion performance state." When the AT game state in the main control means is fully played for the set number of games (20G), the period of the AT suggestion performance state in the sub control means coincides with the period of the AT game state. However, if the AT game state is shifted to the ending game state before the set number of games in the AT game state is exhausted, the AT suggestive performance state is maintained and the AT suggestive performance is performed even during the ending game state (Fig. 75). Then, when a predetermined condition (also referred to as "AT suggested performance end condition") is satisfied, a performance corresponding to the ending game state (also referred to as "ending suggested performance") is performed. The state in which this ending suggestion performance is executed is hereinafter referred to as the "ending suggestion performance state." Note that the AT suggestion performance end condition may be, for example, that the number of games initially set as the set number of games in the AT gaming state is completed.

In addition, a predetermined timing of the game (for example, a predetermined timing after receiving the third stop operation, for example, a winning determination Afterward (after determining the stop symbol or when accepting the third stop operation, etc.), a freeze (also referred to as "AT end suggestion freeze") is set by the main control means to suggest that the AT gaming state ends. On the other hand, if the main control means has shifted to the ending game state, but the sub-control means is in the AT-suggestion performance state, the AT-suggestion performance state in the sub-control means ends at a predetermined timing of the game (for example, at the third stop). AT termination suggestion freeze is also set by the main control means when an operation is received). Therefore, depending on whether the AT end suggestion freeze is executed or not, whether the AT gaming state in the main control means and the AT suggestion performance state in the sub control means have ended at the same time, or whether the main control means has already transitioned to the ending gaming state. It is impossible to determine whether only the AT suggestion performance state in the sub-control means has ended. Incidentally, when the AT end suggestion freeze is performed by the main control means, the sub control means may also perform an effect (also referred to as "AT end suggestion effect") suggesting that the AT gaming state will end. Further, in this embodiment, an AT suggestion performance, an AT end suggestion performance, an ending suggestion performance, and an ending transition suggestion performance are performed using an image display device (corresponding to the image display device 11 described in the first embodiment). These effects may be performed using a display device different from the image display device.

In this way, even if the main control means shifts to the ending game state in the middle of the AT game state, the sub control means maintains the AT suggestion performance state and performs the AT suggestion performance, so that the player is not informed of the AT game state. It can give the impression that it is continuing. Therefore, even if the AT game state is shifted to the ending game state in the middle, the player does not know that, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like he has lost money. Further, when a continuous performance is being performed by the sub-control means as an AT suggestion performance, the main control means may shift from the AT game state to the ending game state. In such a case, if the sub-control means cancels the continuous performance and executes the ending performance, the player may not be able to see the result of the continuous performance and may feel like a loss. By continuing the continuous performance, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In addition, in the AT gaming state, the main control means may perform a lottery (also referred to as "AT additional lottery") to determine whether or not to add on the number of AT games, triggered by the winning of a rare combination. In addition, if you win the AT mid-addition lottery, the sub-control means conducts a lottery to determine whether or not to notify you of the fact (also referred to as "AT mid-addition notification lottery"), and if you win, perform an additional notification effect. You can do it like this. On the other hand, even in the ending game state, the main control means may perform a lottery (also referred to as a "limit add-on lottery") to determine whether or not to add on the number of AT games, triggered by the winning of a rare combination. In addition, if you win the limit bonus lottery, the sub-control means conducts a lottery to decide whether to notify you of the fact (also referred to as "limit bonus notification lottery"), and if you win, perform the bonus notification effect. You can do it like this. By allowing the possibility of AT addition even in the ending game state, it becomes possible to enhance the gameplay during the ending game state. On the other hand, in the ending game state, if the bonus is not added even if a rare role is won, the player will feel that it is a loss (the winning of a rare role, etc. is wasted), and this will lead to a decrease in the desire to play. There is a possibility. In addition, as a benefit other than adding to the number of AT games, if you win a rare role in the ending game state, you will be able to have a specific character appear on the image display screen or perform a specific production. You may also provide benefits such as: Alternatively, the configuration may be such that when a rare combination is won in the ending game state, the charge suggestion mode=3 is more likely to be set.

In addition, the probability that the additional notification performance will be executed in the state where the main control means is in the ending game state but the sub-control means is in the AT suggestion performance state (also referred to as "AT game state 1") (= probability of execution in the additional lottery during limit) Probability of winning x probability of winning in the limit additional notification lottery) is the result of the additional notification performance in the state where the main control means is in the AT gaming state and the sub control means is in the AT suggestive performance state (also referred to as "AT gaming state 2"). It is preferable to set the probability to be the same as the probability of execution (=probability of winning in the AT supplementary lottery x winning probability in the AT supplementary notification lottery). By doing this, there is no difference in the frequency of occurrence of additional notification performances between AT gaming state 1 and AT gaming state 2, so it is not possible to determine that the AT gaming state is 1 based on the frequency of occurrence of additional notification performances. You can do it like this.

In addition, in both AT gaming state 1 and AT gaming state 2, there is a sub-effect that suggests that there may be an additional number of AT games (also referred to as an "additional suggestion effect") triggered by the winning of a rare combination, etc. It may also be executed by a control means. In that case, it is preferable that the frequency at which the top-up suggestion performance occurs in the AT gaming state 1 is set to be equal to the frequency at which the top-up suggestion performance occurs at the AT gaming state 2. Furthermore, if multiple types of additional suggestion performances with different performance modes (performance contents) are to occur in AT gaming state 2, all types of additional suggestion performances should be made to occur in AT gaming state 1 as well. It is preferable that the frequency at which each type of top-up suggestion performance occurs is also set to be the same in AT gaming state 1 and AT gaming state 2. By doing this, there is no difference in the frequency of occurrence of additional suggestive performances between AT gaming state 1 and AT gaming state 2, so it is not possible to determine that AT gaming state 1 is present based on the frequency of occurrence of additional suggestive performances. You can do it like this.

In addition, when the main control means is in the ending game state and the sub-control means is in the ending suggestion presentation state (also referred to as "AT game state 3"), a special add-on that is not performed in AT game state 1 or AT game state 2 is performed. The notification performance and the additional suggestion performance may be performed on the sub-control means side. By doing so, the main control means can change the mode of the additional notification performance and the additional suggestion performance according to the state of the sub control means when in the ending game state. Further, by providing the additional notification performance and the additional suggestion performance exclusively for the AT gaming state 3, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation in the AT gaming state 3 from decreasing. In addition, in this embodiment, a state in which the main control means is in the AT gaming state and the sub-control means is in the ending suggestion performance state does not occur. This can prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game has entered the ending game state when it is actually in the AT game state.

<Game progress control processing>
Hereinafter, among the control processes performed by the main control means of the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the game progress control process will be explained with additional reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. In the following explanation, main gaming state 0 corresponds to the above-mentioned non-advantageous section gaming state, main gaming state 1 and main gaming state 2 correspond to the above-mentioned normal gaming state within the advantageous section, main gaming state 3, Main gaming state 4 and main gaming state 5 correspond to the above-mentioned AT gaming state, and main gaming state 6 and main gaming state 7 correspond to the above-mentioned pullback gaming state. Further, the state in which the limit reaching number is set to 2 in the main game state 5 corresponds to the above-mentioned ending game state.

The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during the game, as described in the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 76, first, the lever control process is performed (step SK1). The content of this lever control process is partially the same as the content of the game start standby process described in the first embodiment. After the lever control processing is completed, the process proceeds to step SK2 and an internal lottery is performed. After the internal lottery is completed, performance group number setting processing is performed (step SK3). The content of this performance group number set process is partially the same as the content of the group number set process described in the first embodiment. Next, the process proceeds to step SK4, where advantageous section display LED lighting processing is performed. In this advantageous section display LED lighting process, control is performed to light up a section indicator to notify that the vehicle is in an advantageous section. After the advantageous section display LED lighting process is completed, advantageous section flag management lever processing is performed (step SK5). In this advantageous section flag management lever process, lever processes for each game state, which will be described later, are performed as one process.

After the advantageous section flag management lever process is completed, a rotation drum stop process is performed (step SK6). In this reel stop processing, control processing is performed to stop each reel based on the order and position of the presses by the player as a result of the internal lottery. Next, advantageous section flag management complete stop processing is performed (step SK7). This advantageous section flag management complete stop processing will be described later. After the advantageous section flag management complete stop processing is completed, a payout process (a process for paying out game medals) is performed (step SK8), and then a count process (a process for updating the values of various counters) is performed (step SK9). After the counting process is completed, the process proceeds to step SK10, where advantageous section clear counter processing is performed. The contents of this advantageous section clear counter process are similar to the contents of the advantageous section clear counter process described in the first embodiment.

In the lever processing for each game state performed in the advantageous section flag management lever processing in step SK5, as shown in FIG. (step SK21). Here, if the advantageous section flag is greater than 0 (step SK21; YES), the process proceeds to step SK22, where instruction generation processing is performed. In this instruction generation process, a preparation process for performing push navigation is performed. After the instruction generation process is completed, an AT sheet number counter updating process, which will be described later, is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SK24. On the other hand, in step SK21, if the advantageous section flag is not greater than 0 (step SK21; NO), the process proceeds to step SK24 without performing the processes of steps SK22 and SK23.

In step SK24, the main game state number is determined, and according to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, main game state 0 lever processing is performed (step S64), and if the main game state number is 1, the main game state 0 lever process is performed. Main game state 1 lever processing is performed (step SK25), and if the main game state number is 1 or 2, main game state 1 and 2 lever processing is performed (step SK26). Furthermore, if the main game state number is 3 or 4, main game state 3 and 4 lever processing is performed (step SK27), and if the main game state number is 5, main game state 5 lever processing is performed (step SK28). ). Further, when the main game state number is 6, main game state 6 lever processing is performed (step SK29), and when the main game state number is 7, main game state 7 lever processing is performed (step SK30).

In the AT number counter updating process performed in step SK23, as shown in FIG. 78, first, the value of the MY counter is stored in the AT number counter (step SK41). Next, it is determined whether the instruction number is greater than 0 (whether push navigation is performed or not) (step SK42). Here, if the instruction number is not larger than 0 (step SK42; NO), the process advances to step SK43, and it is determined whether the production group number is N (N is a predetermined value) (whether the push order winning combination is ). Here, if the presentation group number is N (step SK43; YES), the process proceeds to step SK44, and if the presentation group number is not N (step SK43; NO), the process proceeds to step SK45. On the other hand, in step SK42, if the instruction number is greater than 0 (step SK42; YES), the process directly proceeds to step SK44.

In step SK44, F (the number of payouts when the winning combination is established) is added to the AT coin counter, and the process then proceeds to step SK45. In step SK45, it is determined whether the main game state number is greater than 2 or not. Here, if the main gaming state number is greater than 2 (step SK45; YES), the process proceeds to step SK46, and it is determined whether the limit reached number is 0 or not. Here, if the limit attainment number is 0 (step SK46; YES), the process proceeds to step SK47, and it is determined whether the advantageous section stay G number counter is 1 or not. The advantageous section stay G number counter, like the advantageous section clear counter, is a counter that manages the number of games that are consecutively stayed in the advantageous section.

In step SK47, if the AT stay G number counter is 1 (step SK47; YES), the process proceeds to step SK49; if the AT stay G number counter is not 1 (step SK47; NO), the process proceeds to step SK48, where the AT stay G number counter is is 2100 or more. Here, if the AT number counter is 2100 or more (step SK48; YES), the process advances to step SK49. In step SK49, 1 is saved as the limit reaching number, and then the AT sheet number counter updating process is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not greater than 2 in step SK45 (step SK45; NO), if the limit reached number is not 0 in step SK46 (step SK46; NO), then the AT number counter is If is not 2100 or more (step SK48; NO), the AT sheet number counter updating process is ended and the process returns without performing any further processing.

In the main game state 5 lever process performed in step SK28 of FIG. 77, as shown in FIG. 79, first, it is determined whether or not the limit reaching number is not 2 (step SK61). Here, if the limit reaching number is not 2 (step SK61; YES), the process advances to step SK62, where the main game state 3 and 4 lever processes are performed, after which the main game state 5 lever process is ended, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the lever processing limit attainment number is 2 (step SK61; NO), the process proceeds to step SK63, and it is determined whether the condition device group B number is m (m is a predetermined numerical value). Here, if the condition device group B number is m (step SK63; YES), a limit additional lottery is performed and it is determined whether the winning number is 0 (non-winning) or not (winning) (step SK65). . Here, if the winning number is not 0 (step SK65; NO), the process proceeds to step SK66, and 200 is added to the ending G number counter (a counter that manages the number of games set in the ending game state). On the other hand, if the condition device group B number is not m in step SK63 (step SK63; NO) and if the winning number is 0 in step SK65 (step SK65; YES), the process directly proceeds to step SK67.

In step SK67, it is determined whether the AT number counter exceeds 2400 or not. Here, if the AT number counter exceeds 2400 (step SK67; YES), the process proceeds to step SK69, and if the AT number counter does not exceed 2400 (step SK67; NO), the process proceeds to step SK68. In step SK68, it is determined whether the advantageous section clear counter is 1 or not. Here, if the advantageous section clear counter is not 1 (step SK68; NO), the main game state 5 lever process is finished and the process returns; if the advantageous section clear counter is 1 (step SK68; YES), the process returns to step SK69. move on. In step SK69, 1 is stored in the ending G number counter. Thereafter, 1 is stored in the limit end flag (step SK70), the main game state 5 lever processing is completed, and the process returns.

In the advantageous section flag management complete stop processing performed in step SK7 of FIG. 76, as shown in FIG. 80, first, complete stop processing is performed for each gaming state (step SK81). In this full stop process for each game state, a main game state 5 full stop process to be described later is performed as one process. After the complete stop processing for each gaming state is completed, it is determined whether the limit reaching number is 1 (step SK82). Here, if the limit attainment number is 1 (step SK82; YES), the process proceeds to step SK83, and a limit determination process to be described later is performed. Thereafter, the process completes the full stop process for each gaming state and returns. On the other hand, if the limit reaching number is not 1 in step SK82 (step SK82; NO), the process immediately ends the full stop process for each gaming state and returns.

In the main game state 5 full stop process performed in the advantageous section flag management full stop process of step SK81 in FIG. 80, as shown in FIG. 1 (step SK101). Next, it is determined whether the weight reservation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step SK102). Here, if the weight reservation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step SK102; YES), the process advances to step SK103, and 5 is saved in the main game state number. Then, p (a predetermined numerical value) is stored in the standby performance number at the start of the game (a number for managing the type of standby performance at the start of the game) (step SK104), and the process proceeds to step SK105. On the other hand, if the weight reservation counter after subtraction is not 0 in step SK102 (step SK102; NO), the process proceeds to step SK105 without performing steps SK103 and SK104.

In step SK105, the ending G number counter is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the ending G number counter is 0 (step SK106). Here, if the ending G number counter is 0 (step SK106; YES), the process proceeds to step SK107, and it is determined whether the limit reaching number is 2 or not. Here, if the limit reaching number is 2 (step SK107; YES), the process proceeds to step SK108, stores 1 in the advantageous section clear counter, and then proceeds to step SK110. On the other hand, if the limit reached number is not 2 in step SK107 (step SK107; NO), the process advances to step SK109, where a state transition process (process for transitioning the gaming state) is performed, and then the process advances to step SK110. Further, if the ending G number counter is not 0 in step SK106 (step SK106; NO), the process directly proceeds to step SK110. In step SK110, a clearing process at full stop during AT (a process for clearing predetermined data etc. used during AT) is performed, and the main game state 5 full stop process is completed.

In the limit determination process performed in step SK83 of FIG. 80, as shown in FIG. 82, 1 is first added to the limit reaching number (step SK121). Next, it is determined whether the main game state number is one of 3 to 5 (step SK122). Here, if the main game state number is one of 3 to 5 (step SK122; YES), the process advances to step SK123, and the value of the ATG number counter is stored in the ending G number counter. The ATG number counter is a counter that manages the number of games played during AT, and is set to, for example, "20" when AT is set (including resetting), and thereafter every time a game is played during AT. is subtracted by 1.

Next, the remainder when the value of the ending G number counter is divided by 20 is stored in the weight reservation counter (step SK124). Then, it is determined whether the wait reservation counter is 0 (step SK124). Here, if the wait reservation counter is 0 (step SK125; YES), the process advances to step SK126, and the standby effect number at the end of the game (a number for managing the type of standby effect at the end of the game) is set to q (a predetermined number). ) is saved (step SK104), and the process proceeds to step SK107. On the other hand, if the wait reservation counter is not 0 in step SK125 (step SK125; NO), the process advances to step SK128. Further, if the main gaming state number is not one of 3 to 5 in step SK122 (step SK122; NO), the process directly proceeds to step SK127.

In step SK127, 5 is saved as the main game state number, and after saving, the process advances to step SK128. In step SK128, an ending G number lottery (a lottery to determine the number of games set in the ending game state) is performed. Next, the lottery result (value of the number of games) corresponding to the winning number in the ending G number lottery is obtained (step SK129). Then, the lottery result is added to the value obtained by multiplying the value of the AT stock counter (the counter for managing the above-mentioned number of charges) by 20 (step SK130). Subsequently, the addition result at step SK130 is added to the ending G number counter (step SK131), and 5 is stored in the main game state number (step SK132). Then, unnecessary variables and the like are cleared (step SK133), the limit determination process is ended, and the process returns.

《Fifth embodiment》
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to a fifth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a "slot machine of the fifth embodiment") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 83 to 95. Below, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment will be mainly explained. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to application to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. Note that the slot machine of the fifth embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Moreover, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described for the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment in the same manner or with some changes in the process contents. The characteristic configurations of the slot machines of the second to fourth embodiments described above can also be applied to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment in the same way or with some changes in content.

<Basic configuration>
Before explaining the characteristic parts, the basic configuration of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment (the configuration particularly relevant to the description of the characteristic parts) will be briefly explained. Although not shown, the slot machine of the fifth embodiment includes three reels (corresponding to the above-mentioned reels 3a to 3c) and a start lever (the above-mentioned start lever 25) that is operated to start rotating all the reels. ), three stop switches (corresponding to the above-mentioned stop switches 26a to 26c) on the left, middle, and right that accept stop operations for individually stopping the rotation of each reel, and a game for production. It is equipped with sub-buttons that are operated when performing the following or displaying gaming machine information. Further, the slot machine of the fifth embodiment has three control boards as main control boards: a main control board, a sub-main control board, and a sub-sub control board (the above-mentioned main control board 60, sub-main control board 70A, and sub-sub control board). (corresponding to the control board 70B). Control regarding acceptance of operations for the start lever and stop switch, etc. is performed by the main control board, and control regarding acceptance of operations, etc. for the sub-buttons, is performed by a sub-main control board or a sub-sub control board.

Each stop switch has a button-like operation receiving section that retracts when the player presses it with his/her hand and returns to its original position due to spring force, etc. when the player releases his or her hand. When the button is pressed), the electrical circuit contacts close and switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (your hand leaves), the contacts open and switch from the ON state to the OFF state. It has become. When each stop switch effectively receives a stop operation and switches from the OFF state to the ON state, the main control board (main control means) transfers the stop operation from the main control board (main control means) to the sub-main control board (sub-main control means). Control commands (first, second, and third stop acceptance commands) including information indicating the above are transmitted. By receiving these stop acceptance commands, the sub-main control board can identify that each stop switch has effectively received a stop operation (first, second, and third stop operation).

In addition, after each stop switch has effectively accepted the stop operation, when the stop operation is canceled and each stop switch switches from the on state to the off state, the main control board transfers the received stop operation from the main control board to the sub main control board. A control command (stop operation cancellation command) including information indicating that the operation has been canceled is transmitted. Specifically, a control command that includes information indicating that the first stop operation has been canceled (referred to as a "first stop operation cancellation command"), and a control command that includes information that indicates that the second stop operation has been canceled. (referred to as a "second stop operation cancellation command"), and a control command (referred to as a "third stop operation release command") including information indicating that the third stop operation has been canceled. By receiving these stop operation release commands, the sub-main control board can identify that the stop operation that has been effectively accepted by each stop switch has been canceled (the player's hand has left the stop switch). can. Note that the first and second stop operation release commands may not be sent, and only the third stop operation release command may be sent.

Additionally, when the start lever operation is effectively accepted, the main control board sends various control commands (collectively referred to as "lever operation reception (also referred to as "time command") is transmitted. By receiving this lever operation acceptance command, the sub-main control board can identify that the start lever operation has been effectively accepted (that the start lever has been effectively operated).

The sub-button has, for example, a button-shaped operation reception part that retracts when pressed by the player's hand and returns to its original position due to spring force, etc. when the player releases the hand, and a cross-shaped operation reception part with an arrow. When the operation reception part is pressed (pressed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit close and switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressure operation is released (the hand is removed), the contacts open and the ON state is turned on. It is designed to switch from to the off state. When a sub-button is operated effectively, a sub-control board (sub-control means) may execute a predetermined performance process corresponding to the sub-button. In addition, an effect process may be performed that prompts the player to operate a sub-button. Furthermore, by operating the sub-buttons in a predetermined procedure, it is possible to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the brightness of the screen of the image display section and the volume of the speaker. Hereinafter, several characteristic parts of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment will be sequentially explained.

<Display performance>
The slot machine of the fifth embodiment includes an image display section DP (see FIGS. 83 to 92, etc.) corresponding to the image display screen 11a of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1, and in this image display section DP, It is designed to perform various display effects. Further, the slot machine of the fifth embodiment includes an audio output section (not shown) corresponding to the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b in the slot machine 1, and from this audio output section, effects corresponding to each display effect are output. It is designed to output audio for use. Examples of display effects executed in the slot machine of the fifth type include conversation effects (also referred to as "dialogue effects"), subtitle effects (also referred to as "telop effects"), and expectation effects (also referred to as "object effects"). , GET effect, scene switching effect, and blackout effect.

・Conversation production Conversation production includes, for example, people, animals, plants, robots, monsters (whether real or imaginary), etc. (collectively referred to as ``characters'') set as image characters for gaming machines. , is a conversation effect in which predetermined lines uttered by each character are displayed on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal panel, and sound is output from an audio output unit such as a speaker. Conversation presentations provide players with information that is not related to gaming results, such as introducing characters to players, explaining content about gaming methods, or explaining content about gaming machine models and specifications. It may play the role of informing the player, or it may play the role of informing the player of content related to the game result, such as suggesting the degree of expectation for awarding an advantageous game. An advantageous game is a game that is more advantageous to the player than usual (for example, a game during AT (including during ART) in a slot machine, a bonus game, a game during a jackpot in a pachinko machine, a probability-changing game, or a time-saving game) This refers to games (hereinafter also referred to as ``advantageous games''). Furthermore, the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous game refers to a game result in which the probability of executing an advantageous game or permitting the execution of an advantageous game is high (including the case of 100%) (for example, AT in a slot machine). Winning, AT add-on win, add-on win with a large number of AT add-ons, bonus win, advantageous bonus win, rare role win, jackpot win on a pachinko machine, guaranteed variable jackpot (more advantageous jackpot than a non-probable jackpot) win, 16 round jackpot ( It refers to the level of expectation (reliability, accuracy) of getting a jackpot with a large number of jackpots, winning, etc.). In the conversation performance, a predetermined display for the conversation performance (also referred to as a "conversation performance display") is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. Note that the term "display" is not limited to a two-dimensional (planar) image display, but also includes a three-dimensional (stereoscopic) display such as a hologram. Note that the conversation effect may be in a mode in which two or more characters talk with each other, or in a mode in which one character speaks to the player. In short, at least a character image and dialogue characters corresponding to the character image satisfy the requirements for conversation production.

The conversation effect display is a display related to what each character says in a conversation between a plurality of characters, and includes a character display and a display that can be identified as text. Specifically, the character display is, for example, the display of a picture (picture) showing the appearance (appearance, mainly the face) of the character speaking (also referred to as "character picture display"). On the other hand, a display that can be identified as text is, for example, a display of characters (also referred to as a "line display") that indicates the content of a character's utterance (also referred to as a "line" in a conversation effect display). In addition to the character image display and dialogue display, the conversation effect display usually includes a display that allows identification of the character's name. Specifically, the display by which the name of the character can be identified is, for example, a display of characters indicating the name of the character who speaks (also referred to as "character name display"). The conversation effect display is configured to include a character image display, a dialogue display, and a character name display, but a conversation effect display that does not include a character name display and is configured by a character image display and a dialogue display may be provided. As specific examples of conversation effect displays, a first conversation effect display KD1 is shown in FIG. 83(A), and a second conversation effect display KD2 is shown in FIG. 83(B).

The first conversation effect display KD1 includes a character image display KG1 that displays the appearance of the character CH1, a character name display KN1 that displays the name of the character CH1 ("Kenji"), and a line of the character CH1 ("It's a nice day today"). and a dialogue display KS1 that displays the message "It's ok"). The dialogue display KS1 uses a frame-like image ("range KW1 (also referred to as "picture") is also displayed along with the dialogue. Similarly, the second conversation effect display KD2 includes a character image display KG2 that displays the appearance of a character CH2 different from the character CH1, a character name display KN2 that displays the name of the character CH2 ("Pamela"), and a character image display KN2 that displays the character CH2's name ("Pamela"). It is configured to include a dialogue display KS2 that displays a dialogue by CH2 (``It's okay to be carefree''). In the dialogue display KS2, a range image KW2 is also displayed.

In the first conversation effect display KD1, a character image display KG1, a character name display KN1, a line display KS1, and a range image KW1 are used as display components constituting the first conversation effect display KD1. They are displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP at the same timing. Similarly, in the second conversation effect display KD2, the character image display KG2, character name display KN2, dialogue display KS2, and range image KW2 are displayed during one game as each display component constituting the second conversation effect display KD2. is displayed in another predetermined area (for example, an area that does not overlap with the area where the first conversation image KG1 is displayed) of the image display section DP at another predetermined same timing. As a modification example, for example, in the first conversation effect display KD1, the character image display KG1 and the character name display KN1 are displayed first, and then (for example, after 0.2 seconds), the dialogue display KS1 is displayed together with the range image KW1. The display timing may be slightly different between the display components, such as when the display component is displayed. This point also applies to the second conversation effect display KD2.

The timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed is determined by the operation of predetermined switches (for example, bet switch, start lever, stop switch, etc., also collectively referred to as "main side switches") controlled by the main control means. Any timing triggered by this event (display trigger) can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the conversation effect display. For example, during one game, when the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted, a predetermined timing (when the lever operation is accepted) after the start lever accepts the operation (also referred to as ``when the lever operation is accepted'') is triggered. The first conversation effect display KD1 may be displayed on the image display section DP at the same timing as the above, or at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the lever operation was accepted. Also, during the same game, when any of the three stop switches effectively receives the first stop operation, the time when the first stop operation is effectively accepted (when the first stop operation is accepted) The second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed on the image display section DP at a subsequent predetermined timing (the same timing as when the first stop operation is accepted or a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first stop operation was accepted). You can do it like this. In addition, if the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 are displayed at the timing when the third stop operation is accepted, the operation of the bet switch to start the next game is accepted or the start lever is operated. When the reception is performed, the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 displayed on the image display section DP are erased, and the bet switch for starting the next game is When the operation is accepted or the start lever is accepted and the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 are erased, all the voices of the lines being output from the audio output section are not yet output. If not, the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 on the image display section DP are erased, but the audio of the dialogue may be output until the end. However, if a new conversation effect or a rare role announcement or freeze effect that the player wants to focus on is selected by accepting the start lever operation for the next game, the audio of the dialogue will be output at the timing after the start lever operation is accepted. Canceled. With this configuration, even a player who wants to advance the game quickly can understand the contents of the performance. It goes without saying that the audio of the dialogue may be erased together with the erasure of the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 on the image display section DP.

As the timing for displaying the conversation effect display, any timing triggered by the operation of the sub-button controlled by the sub-control means (display trigger) can also be set as the display timing of the conversation effect display. For example, during one game, an image that prompts the player to operate a sub-button (for example, an image that combines the image of a sub-button and the word "PUSH") is displayed on the image display section DP. Then, the sub-button is activated when the sub-button is activated according to the display (including cases in which the sub-button is activated by being activated once, as well as cases in which it is activated by being activated a predetermined number of times in succession). , at a predetermined timing (same timing as the sub-button operation or timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the sub-button operation) after the sub-button is operated (also referred to as "sub-button operation time"). The first conversation effect display KD1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 may be displayed on the image display section DP. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed is, for example, the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time when the game ball enters the starting slot (also referred to as "starting slot winning time"). It can be set as the display timing of the effect display.

During one game, there are cases in which no conversation effects are displayed, cases in which only one conversation effect is displayed, and cases in which a plurality of conversation effects are displayed. The difference in the number of conversation effect displays displayed during one game may not be related to the game result, or the difference in the number may cause the game result to be different. For example, the degree of expectation that an advantageous game will be given may be made higher when two or more conversation effects are displayed than when only one conversation effect is displayed during one game. Whether or not to display a conversation effect display, the type and number of conversation effect displays to be displayed (for example, the type of lines in a dialogue display), the display timing, etc., can be determined based on, for example, the game status (for example, whether or not it is in an advantageous section). , determined based on the results of an internal lottery (for example, whether or not a rare prize has been won), other lottery results such as AT lottery and AT additional lottery (based on satisfying other predetermined conditions) ). When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed, at most one conversation effect display is displayed per display opportunity.

For example, in a case where the first conversation effect display KD1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 are displayed during one game, if the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed in response to operation of the start lever, the first conversation effect display KD2 is displayed during one game. The second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed after any one of the three stop switches has effectively received the first stop operation. That is, the second conversation effect display KD2 is not displayed before the first stop operation is effectively accepted (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed). Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by varying the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game depending on when the conversation effect display is displayed. Additionally, by allowing up to one display per display opportunity, it is possible to prevent players from misrecognizing the occasion when a conversation effect display was displayed or from confusing multiple displayed conversation effect displays. It becomes possible to do so.

Three or more conversation effect displays may be displayed on the image display section DP during one game. For example, the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed when the first stop operation is accepted, and then during the same game, the remaining 2 When one of the two stop switches effectively receives the second stop operation, a predetermined timing after receiving the second stop operation (at the same timing as when receiving the second stop operation or at the same timing as the second stop operation) A third conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time of reception, and furthermore, when the remaining one stop switch has effectively accepted the third stop operation, the third conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed. At a predetermined timing after receiving the third stop operation (the same timing as when receiving the third stop operation or a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the third stop operation), a fourth conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed. It may be displayed. The character in the third conversation effect display and the character in the fourth conversation effect display may be different characters from character CH1 and character CH2, or may be the same character.

When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed on the image display section DP during one game, the conversation effect display that is displayed first is erased from the image display section DP even if a conversation effect display that is displayed later is displayed. It continues to be displayed without being hidden (hidden). For example, in the above example, the first conversation effect display KD1 that was displayed first is not hidden and continues to be displayed even if the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed, and then the third conversation effect display KD2 is displayed. Even if the conversation effect display KD1 and KD2 are displayed, the first and second conversation effect displays KD1 and KD2 are not hidden and continue to be displayed. Furthermore, even if the fourth conversation effect display is displayed after that, the first to third conversation effect displays are not hidden but are displayed at that point. In this way, by making the conversation effect display that was displayed first continue to be displayed even if the conversation effect display that is displayed later is displayed, multiple conversation effect displays can be displayed simultaneously during one game. They can be displayed on the image display section DP (so that the display periods of each conversation effect display partially overlap each other). Thereby, it is possible to obtain a production effect that makes the image display section DP look lively by displaying a plurality of conversation productions. In addition, when the player is likely to feel tired because the player is in a gaming state in which there is a low possibility of obtaining an advantageous gaming result (for example, during a non-advantageous period), multiple conversation effects can be displayed in one By displaying them throughout the game, it is possible to direct the player's attention to these conversation effect displays, thereby reducing the player's feeling of fatigue. Furthermore, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game may differ depending on when the conversation effect display is displayed, and in that case, it is possible to make the player interested in the display timing of the conversation effect. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the conversation effect display, the content of the character's lines (for example, the content of the line display KS1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 or the content of the line display KS2 in the second conversation effect display KD2) is determined by the content of the character's lines. However, the game results may not be related to the game results, or the game results may differ depending on the content of the lines. For example, in a case where the content of the dialogue display KS2 is "It's okay to be carefree" (see Figure 83(B)) and "It's true" (see Figure 84), in both cases, It may be set so as not to affect the game result in any way, or it may be set so that the expectation level for awarding an advantageous game is higher in the latter case than in the former case. Furthermore, the contents of the dialogue may be changed in response to the operation of a sub-button. In addition, there are two cases in which the content of the dialogue changes when the sub-button is operated: when the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue display starts to be displayed) when the sub-button is operated, and when the dialogue is displayed and then the dialogue content changes. There may also be cases where the content of the lines changes when a button is operated. If the dialogue content changes by operating a sub-button after the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue audio is also output at the same time), the sub-button operation (operation reception) should be enabled before the dialogue audio has finished. Alternatively, the operation of the sub-button may be enabled after the dialogue voice ends. If you enable sub-button operation while the dialogue audio has not finished, if the sub-button is operated in the middle of the dialogue audio, the dialogue being output will be interrupted and a new dialogue will be output, resulting in a change in game results. This specification is preferred by players who want to know quickly. Furthermore, if the sub-button operation is enabled after the dialogue voice ends, the dialogue will not be interrupted, making this specification preferred by players who want to enjoy the performance.

In addition, the characters displayed in the dialog display may always have the same font (font and style), the same size (size), and the same color, or may vary depending on the game situation and the display timing of the conversation display. The colors may be different. Further, depending on the font, size, color, etc., the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may vary. For example, when displaying serifs, one or both of the outer line (outline) and the area inside the outer line of the character is displayed in blue, in addition to the normal color (for example, black or white). (also referred to as "blue serif display") and red serif display (also referred to as "red serif display"). In that case, red serif display is better than blue serif display. It may be arranged so that the degree of expectation of providing an advantageous game increases.

As an example, in Fig. 85(A), the character Kenji's line ``It's nice weather today'' is displayed in blue serif with the area inside the outline of the character blue, and the character Pamela's line ``It's really true'' is displayed in blue serif. , shows an example of a red serif display in which the outline of the characters is red (the area inside the outline is white). In this example, the size of the characters in the red serif display is made larger than the size of the characters in the blue serif display, and even due to the difference in size, we will show that the red serif display has a higher expectation that the game will be more advantageous. It is suggested to the person. In the red serif display, not only the font size of the serif display, but also the character size of the character image display and the font size of the character name display may be increased. In other words, in the red serif display, one or two or all of the font size for the serif display, the font size for the character name display, and the character size may be larger than those for the blue serif display (characters, etc. (You can change only the color of the text, but keep the font size, etc.) In addition, when multiple conversation effects are displayed during one game, the characters of the dialogue display in the first conversation effect display (for example, the first conversation effect display KD1) may be changed to one type of size or font. As for the characters in the dialogue display in the second and subsequent conversation effect displays (for example, the first conversation effect display KD1), there may be a plurality of types of characters with different sizes and fonts.

When displaying multiple conversation effects with different expectations for giving an advantageous game during a single game, such as a blue serif display and a red serif display, the conversation effect display with the higher expectation level is displayed later. (It is also possible to set up a case where it is displayed first). Therefore, when multiple conversation effect displays are displayed during one game, the conversation effect display that is displayed first (for example, the first conversation effect display KD1) may display lines in normal colors or in colors with low expectations. Dialogue displays are likely to be displayed, and in the second and subsequent conversation effect displays (for example, second conversation effect display KD2), dialogue displays are likely to be displayed in colors with high expectations. In the case of blue serif display and red serif display, for example, the blue serif display is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the red serif display is displayed when the first stop operation is accepted. Note that a case may be provided in which a red serif display with a relatively high expectation level is displayed so as to overlap a blue serif display with a relatively low expectation level. When displaying them in an overlapping manner, part or all of the characters in the blue serif display may be hidden by the red serif display (see Figure 84 (B)), or the characters in the blue serif display may be hidden. Red serif displays may be overlapped (see FIG. 85(A)). Note that when the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed after the first conversation effect display KD1, the color indicating the expectation level of the second conversation effect display KD2 indicates the expectation level of the first conversation effect display KD1. A color whose expected level is lower than the color shown will not be displayed. This is also applied when the third conversation presentation display or the fourth conversation presentation display is displayed, and in the conversation presentation that is later in display order, the expectation level displayed in the earlier conversation presentation is It will never go below. This shows how much the expectation will be when first displaying a red serif display with a high expectation level in the first conversation production display KD1, and then displaying a blue serif display with a low expectation level on the second conversation production display KD2. This prevents it from becoming difficult to understand whether there is a degree or not. Note that there is no problem in displaying the normal mode dialogue display in the second conversation effect display KD2 after displaying the red dialogue display in the first conversation effect display KD1 because it does not confuse the player. In addition, when a conversation effect occurs before and after a reach effect on a pachinko machine, the expectation level of the conversation effect display displayed after the reach effect is lower than the expectation level of the conversation effect display displayed before the reach effect. Good too. This is because expectations are gradually increasing due to the presence of reach effects. For example, before the reach performance, the player is interested in whether or not the game will become a reach, so if a red dialogue display for the conversation performance appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not it will become a reach. On the other hand, since the player is interested in whether or not there will be a jackpot after the reach effect, if the blue lines of the conversation effect appear at this stage, the player expects whether or not there will be a jackpot. Since the expectations are different in this way, it is possible to create an easy-to-understand presentation structure even if the level of expectation decreases before and after the reach effect. Note that the characters displayed in the conversation performance before and after the reach performance may be the same character, or the same character may be displayed in a different manner (for example, with different costumes and facial expressions). , may be another character.

Note that the color of characters, etc. in serif display (colors other than normal colors) is not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to blue serif display and red serif display, green serif display with green text, pattern serif display with text in a specific pattern (for example, a pattern symbolizing a gaming machine manufacturer), A rainbow serif display may be provided in which the characters and the like are colored in rainbow colors. Then, the expectation level for providing an advantageous game may be increased in the order of blue serif display < green serif display < red serif display < pattern serif display < rainbow serif display. At this time, in the case of a dialogue display that has the highest level of expectation (in this example, a rainbow dialogue display), it may be a guaranteed performance with a 100% expectation level (for example, an AT confirmation, a bonus confirmation, a jackpot confirmation, etc.).

The lines displayed in the conversation performance display are usually composed of words and sentences in characters whose meanings can be understood by the player. However, it may be composed of characters whose meanings cannot be understood, such as characters written in an ancient language, garbled characters, or characters containing figures or symbols (▽, ●, *), etc. When a dialogue display containing characters whose meaning cannot be understood is displayed, the expectation level of giving an advantageous game increases compared to when a dialogue display consisting of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. You can do it like this. In addition, character strings (sentences) in dialog display can be displayed in one line (see Figure 83) or displayed over two or more lines with line breaks (consisting of two or more sentences). (see Figure 84).

The range picture KW1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 and the range picture KW2 in the second conversation effect display KD2 both have the shape of a so-called speech bubble, but the shape of the range picture is not limited to this shape and can be any shape. It can be in the shape of The shape of the range image may always be the same, or may vary depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Further, depending on the shape of the range picture, the level of expectation regarding the game result may vary. For example, there are cases where the range picture is displayed in the shape of a speech bubble, and cases where the range picture is displayed in the shape of an arrow. It may be made to increase. Note that such a range image may not be displayed, and the characters in the serif display may be displayed in an exposed state (not surrounded by a frame or the like).

Further, the color, pattern, etc. of the area inside the outline of the range picture may always be the same, or may vary depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Further, depending on the color, pattern, etc. of the area inside the outline, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game may be varied. For example, in addition to displaying the area inside the outline of a range drawing in normal color, there are also modes in which it is displayed in blue (this is also included in the blue serif display) and in red (this is also included in the red serif display). (including in the display), the degree of expectation that an advantageous game will be awarded may be higher in the mode displayed in red than in the mode displayed in blue.

As an example, in FIG. 84(A), for character Kenji's dialogue display, the area inside the outline of the range drawing is displayed in blue with blue serifs, and for the character Pamela's dialogue display, the area inside the outline of the range painting is shown. An example of red serif display with Note that the color of the area inside the outline of the range drawing is not limited to blue and red. For example, the area inside the outline of the range drawing may be colored green (this is also included in the green serif display), a specific pattern (this is also included in the pattern serif display), or rainbow colored (this is also included in the pattern serif display). may also be included in the rainbow serif display). Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 84(A), a case may be provided in which the red serif display is displayed so as to overlap the blue serif display.

The character image display in the conversation effect display may always be the same for the same character, or may be displayed differently even for the same character depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Further, depending on the manner in which the character images are displayed, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game, etc. may be varied. For example, in a case where the character image KG1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed with a hat on and another without a hat, the character image KG1 is displayed with a hat on. It may be arranged such that the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game is higher in the mode in which the game is played than in the mode in which the game is not played.

When the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, a different type of effect display (another image) from the conversation effect display may be displayed on the same image display section DP. In such a case, the conversation effect display and another effect display can be rendered in separate layers (layers) using a layer function installed in the graphic software used for image creation. For example, when an image composed of a moving image or a still image (also referred to as a "background image") is displayed so as to occupy almost the entire area on the screen of the image display section DP, a partial area of the background image If it is desired to display the conversation effect display so as to overlap with the background image, the conversation effect display can be drawn on a layer on the nearer side (front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is drawn. In this way, even if the conversation effect display is displayed over the background image, it is possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the conversation effect display. In addition, when displaying a plurality of conversation effect displays, each conversation effect display may be rendered on a separate layer.

If some kind of error occurs while the conversation presentation display is being displayed on the image display section DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display section DP. In this case, the error notification display is drawn on a layer closer to the front than the layer on which the conversation effect display is drawn, and is displayed so as to overlap the conversation effect display. As an example, FIG. 85(B) shows an example in which an HP error notification display that notifies the occurrence of an HP error is displayed so as to overlap the conversation production display. In this example, the line display of the conversation production display is hidden by the HP error notification display, making it impossible to visually recognize its contents. In this way, when the conversation effect display and the error notification display are displayed on the image display section DP at the same time, the error notification display is displayed overlapping the dialogue display of the conversation effect display, and the contents of the dialogue display become invisible (serifs). (It is also possible to provide a case where an error notification display is displayed so that the contents of the display can be visually confirmed.) In addition to the occurrence of various errors mentioned in the description of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, error notification displays may occur when a communication error or door opening error occurs; in the case of a pachinko machine, left-handed There are times when a warning or lower pan full error occurs. Further, although it is not an error, there is an image suggesting that the reel rotation has stopped as a notification effect to the player in the slot machine. This is an effect in which "Please stop the reels" is displayed on the image display section when the reels have been rotating for a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute). Even when the reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it is displayed in front of the conversation effect display (layer on the near side), so the conversation effect display is difficult to see (it does not have to be visible at all or just a part of it) ). Therefore, the words "Please stop the reels" are displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby effectively alerting the player. Note that the reel rotation stop suggestion image may be deleted when a stop operation is accepted for one of the multiple spinning reels, or it may be deleted when a stop operation is accepted for all reels. You may. In addition, even if a volume change image is displayed due to a volume change button being accepted during a game (while the reels are rotating in the case of a slot machine, while changing in the case of a pachinko machine), the volume will be displayed in front of the conversation effect display. The changed image will be displayed. The volume change image is a meter display that indicates the level of the volume, and the display ends when a decision operation or time elapses after changing the volume, and the conversation effect display becomes visible again.

A conversation effect display may be displayed on the image display section DP when an assist effect is displayed on the image display section DP. As an example, FIG. 86 shows a mode in which a conversation effect display is displayed when a push navigation effect display (particularly a press order navigation effect display that notifies the push order) is displayed on the image display section DP. . In the case of this example, as shown in FIG. 86(A), the push navigation effect display that informs the pressing order of "middle left/right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display section DP. While being displayed, the character Kenji's conversation effect display is displayed. At this time, Kenji's conversation effect display is displayed in an area above the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 86(B), after receiving the first stop operation, a push navigation effect display is displayed at the bottom of the image display section DP that informs you of the "left and right" press order from the second stop operation to the third stop operation. When the character Pamela is displayed in the area, the conversation effect display of the character Pamela is displayed. At this time, Pamela's conversation effect display is displayed in an area above the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display.

In this way, when the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display section DP while the assist effect is displayed on the image display section DP, the conversation effect display is displayed so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display. More specifically, while dialogue display and character name display in the conversation production display are displayed without overlapping with the push navigation production display, some parts of the character image display (for example, the character's body and hands) are The display may overlap with the push navigation display. In that case, for example, the conversation effect display is drawn on a layer on the back side (the back side away from the player), and the push navigation effect display is drawn on a layer on the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation effect display. It is supposed to be done. Note that a case may be provided in which a part of the line display and character name display in the conversation effect display are displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation effect display. Even in that case, for example, the conversation effect display may be drawn on a layer on the back side, and the push navigation effect display may be drawn on a layer on the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation effect display. It is preferable to do so. In addition, the lines in the conversation effect display shown in FIGS. 86(A) and 86(B) ("It seems you should press in the order of the navigation", "Follow the navigation") are based on the game method. This example shows the case where the content is related to In addition to this, there are other details regarding how to play, such as ``Drawing a watermelon during a special zone seems to be hot,'' ``Push from the left during normal times,'' ``Follow the navigation during AT,'' and ``Drawing a watermelon during normal times.'' The content can be various, such as ``If a UFO appears somewhere in the background image, there is a chance''.

When the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, the conversation effect sound is outputted from the audio output section in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The conversation effect sound basically has the same content as the content of the characters' lines in the conversation effect display. For example, if the content of the line display KS1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 is "It's a nice day today, isn't it?", the corresponding conversation effect audio is the audio content "It's fun today." On the other hand, a case may be provided in which a voice having a content different from the content of the characters' lines in the conversation effect display is output as the conversation effect sound. For example, if the content of the dialogue display KS1 is meaningless such as "※↓●//っwog◇#", a conversation production voice with an understandable content such as "Today is a good day" is output. You may also do so. When the contents of the lines in the conversation effect display are different from the contents of the conversation effect audio, the expectation level for giving an advantageous game may be increased compared to the case where both contents match.

・Subtitle production Subtitle production (also referred to as "subtitle production") is, for example, a character appearing in a background image (video image) saying something (this can be said during a conversation with another character or talking to oneself), and the content of the statement is displayed. This is an effect that makes the characters appear similar to the subtitles of a movie or the subtitles of a movie that appears on the screen during a TV broadcast. Subtitle production mainly plays the role of informing the player of content related to the game, such as hinting at the progress of the game, etc., but it also plays the role of informing the player of content that is not related to the game. Good too. In subtitle presentation, a subtitle presentation display for subtitle presentation is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. Further, the subtitle performance may play a role of informing the player of content related to the game result, such as suggesting the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game. An advantageous game is a game that is more advantageous to the player than usual (for example, a game during AT (including during ART) in a slot machine, a bonus game, a game during a jackpot in a pachinko machine, a probability-changing game, or a time-saving game) Refers to games, etc. (collectively referred to as "advantageous games").In addition, the degree of expectation for granting advantageous games means that the probability of executing an advantageous game or allowing the execution of an advantageous game increases. Game results (including cases where the percentage is 100%) (for example, AT winnings in slot machines, AT addition winnings, additional winnings with a large number of AT additions, bonus winnings, advantageous bonus winnings, rare prize winnings, jackpot winnings in pachinko machines, This refers to the level of expectation (reliability, accuracy) of winning a guaranteed variable jackpot (a jackpot that is more advantageous than a non-probable jackpot), winning a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot with many jackpots, etc.).In subtitle production, A subtitle effect display for subtitle effect is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing.

The subtitle effect display is a display related to the speech of a character appearing in a background image, and includes a display that can be identified as text. Specifically, the display that can be identified as text is, for example, a display of characters (also referred to as a "telop display") that indicates the contents of a character's utterance (corresponding to lines in a conversation production display). Note that when the subtitle effect display is displayed, the character does not necessarily have to be displayed in the background image; in short, the requirements for the subtitle effect display are satisfied as long as the character is displayed on the background image. The subtitle effect display is drawn on a layer on the nearer side (front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is drawn. Therefore, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image, the visibility of the subtitle effect display (particularly the telop display) is sufficiently ensured. As examples of subtitle effect displays, a first subtitle effect display JD1 is shown in FIG. 87(A), and a second subtitle effect display JD2 is shown in FIG. 87(B).

The first subtitle effect display JD1 shows the content of a statement made by the character CH1 ("It's nice weather and looks like a chance!") that appears in one scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display section DP during one game. It is configured to include the telop display JT1. In this way, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is configured to include the subtitle display JT1, and the display indicating the name ("Kenji") of the character CH1 (referred to as the "character name display" in the same way as the conversation effect display) is Not included. The second subtitle effect display JD2 is another remark by the character CH1 that appears in a different scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display section DP during the same game ("The weather is getting cloudy. !”) is included in the subtitle display JT2. In this way, the second subtitle effect display JD2 includes the telop display JT2, but does not include the character name display (it is also possible to provide a subtitle effect display including the character name display). Note that in the telop display, the name of the character may be displayed as part of the statement. In this case, the name display is considered to be different from the character name display.

Regarding the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed, the subtitle display can be displayed at any timing triggered by the operation of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means such as a bet switch, start lever, or stop switch (display trigger). The display timing (display start timing) of the effect display can be set as appropriate. For example, during one game, when the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted, a predetermined timing after the start lever effectively accepts the operation (when the lever operation is accepted) (at the same time as when the lever operation is accepted) Alternatively, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed on the image display section DP at the time when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the lever operation was accepted. Also, during the same game, when any of the three stop switches effectively receives the first stop operation, the time when the first stop operation is effectively accepted (when the first stop operation is accepted) The second subtitle effect display JD2 may appear on the image display section DP at a subsequent predetermined timing (at the same time as the reception of the first stop operation or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the first stop operation). . In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed is, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time the game ball enters the starting slot (also referred to as "starting slot winning time" or "variation start time"). From the timing of this point, any time when the SP reach effect is displayed after the reach is established, or the time when the big winning hole is opened (also referred to as "when the big winning hole opens" or "when the jackpot starts") Set the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, or the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the game ball enters the grand prize opening (also referred to as "the time of winning the grand prize opening") as the display timing of the subtitle effect display. can do.

During one game, there are cases in which no subtitle effects are displayed, cases in which only one subtitle effect is displayed, and cases in which a plurality of subtitle effects are displayed. Whether or not to display subtitle effects, the type and number of subtitle effects to be displayed (for example, the type of content of subtitle display), the display timing, etc., can be determined based on, for example, the gaming status (for example, whether or not it is in an advantageous section). , determined based on the results of an internal lottery (for example, whether or not a rare prize has been won), other lottery results such as AT lottery and AT additional lottery (based on satisfying other predetermined conditions) ). Note that even if the internal lottery results are the same, the subtitle effect display is more likely to be displayed during an advantageous section than during a non-advantageous section. When a plurality of subtitle effects are displayed, a plurality of subtitle effects may be displayed per display opportunity. For example, in a case where the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the second subtitle effect display JD2 are displayed during one game, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed in response to the operation reception of the start lever, and then three subtitle effects are displayed. The second subtitle effect display JD2 may be displayed before any of the stop switches effectively accepts the first stop operation (up to one subtitle display can be displayed per display trigger). ).

Three or more subtitle effects may be displayed on the image display section DP during one game. For example, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed when the first stop operation is accepted, and then during the same game, the remaining 2 subtitle effects are displayed. Triggered by one of the two stop switches validly accepting the second stop operation, a predetermined timing (second A third subtitle effect display (not shown) is displayed at a predetermined timing (at the same time as when the stop operation is received or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second stop operation is received), and the remaining one stop switch is Triggered by the valid reception of the third stop operation, a predetermined timing after the point in time when the third stop operation is validly received (at the time of reception of the third stop operation) (at the same time as the reception of the third stop operation or A fourth subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation was received.

In addition, the percentage of cases in which subtitle effects are displayed when the start lever operation is accepted (including cases of 0% and 100%; the same applies hereinafter) and the proportion of cases in which subtitle effects are displayed when the third stop operation is accepted are shown below. Comparing the ratio when the subtitle effect is displayed, the ratio when the subtitle effect display is displayed in response to reception of the third stop operation is relatively higher. This takes into account the psychology of players who want to concentrate on operating the stop switch after operating the start lever, and by relatively increasing the proportion of subtitle effects displayed after the third stop operation, the player It becomes easier to pay attention to the performance display. In addition, when the background image is a one-shot performance (a performance that starts and ends during one game), the subtitle performance display is rarely displayed when the first stop operation reception or the second stop operation reception is received, but the background image When the image is a continuous performance (a performance that continues over multiple games), subtitle performance display is often displayed in response to the reception of the first stop operation or the reception of the second stop operation. For example, if we compare a case where a subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a single effect (case H1) and a case where a subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a continuous effect (case H2), , the proportion of subtitle effect display triggered by the reception of the first stop operation is relatively higher in case H2 than in case H1. This is because the continuous performance plays the role of informing the player of a predetermined game result (AT winning, etc.) that is of high interest to the player, and in order to draw attention to the performance content, the performance content is often advanced each time a stop operation is received. Therefore, it is easy to provide an opportunity to display the subtitle performance display according to the progress of the continuous performance using the reception of the first stop operation or the reception of the second stop operation as an opportunity. By displaying the subtitle performance display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the continuous performance (progress status of the performance).

If multiple subtitle effects are displayed on the image display section DP during one game, the subtitle effect displayed first will be deleted from the image display section DP at the time the subtitle effect displayed later is displayed. (hidden). That is, the subtitle effect display that was displayed first is erased from the image display section DP before the subtitle effect display that is displayed later (including at approximately the same timing). For example, in the above example, the first subtitle effect display JD1 that was displayed first is hidden before the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is hidden from the third subtitle effect display JD2. The subtitle effect display is hidden before being displayed, and the third subtitle effect display is hidden before the fourth subtitle effect display is displayed. In this way, by making the subtitle effect display that was displayed first disappear before the subtitle effect display that is displayed later, the subtitle effect can be appropriately displayed as the game or background image progresses. Subtitle performance can be performed while switching the performance display. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a subtitle performance with a good tempo that is consistent with the progress of the game and the background image.

The subtitle effect display may be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed after being displayed, or may be hidden when a predetermined switch is operated. , the subtitle effect display may be hidden when the next subtitle effect display is displayed. For example, the subtitle effect display that was displayed when the start lever operation was accepted may be hidden when any one of the first to third stop operations is received, or when the stop operation is accepted. The subtitle display effect will be hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display, regardless of whether the subtitle display effect is displayed, or if the next subtitle display effect is displayed even before the first stop operation is received, that subtitle display effect will be displayed. It may be hidden immediately before being displayed. As a specific example, in a case where the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed when the third stop operation is accepted, the third After receiving the stop operation, first the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be hidden, and then the second subtitle effect display may be displayed.

The subtitle effect display may be displayed according to the movement of a character appearing in the background image (for example, the movement of the mouth, eyes, or hands). For example, the background image HG1 (video) starts to be displayed at the same time as the lever is operated, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start, a scene (referred to as scene A) in which the character CH1 in the background image HG1 moves its mouth is displayed. ), the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed in accordance with scene A. In order to match the timing of scene A and the display timing of the first subtitle effect display JD1, the following method may be adopted. As a premise, upon receiving the lever operation, the sub-main control means selects whether or not to display the background image and subtitle effect and selects the display contents based on the results of an internal lottery performed on the main control means side. It is assumed that the display of the image HG1 and the display of the first subtitle effect display JD1 have been determined.

In that case, the sub-main control means first transmits a command (referred to as command A) to the sub-sub control means for transmitting the decision result. Upon receiving the command A, the sub-sub control means reads the image file of the background image HG1 and starts displaying the background image HG1 on the image display section DP, and also reads the image file of the first subtitle effect display JD1, The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display section DP in accordance with the timing of scene A (for example, determined from the number of frames up to scene A, the frame rate, etc.). Note that a time counter may be set and the timing of scene A may be measured using this counter. The counter may be set by the sub-main control means or by the sub-sub control means. If the sub-main control means sets the counter, it may be set when command A is sent, or the sub-sub control means may set the counter (referred to as command B) to the sub-main control at the time when the sub-sub control means reads out the image file of the background image HG1. This command B may be set at the timing when the sub-main control means receives the command B. Then, when a predetermined time is reached after the counter is set, a command (referred to as command C) for notifying the arrival of the time is transmitted to the sub-sub control means, and at the timing when this command C is received, the sub-sub control means The subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display section DP. Note that the subtitle effect display is rendered on a layer on the nearer side (front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is rendered. By doing so, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the visibility of the subtitle effect display (particularly the telop display).

In the subtitle effect display, the content of the subtitle display (for example, the content of the subtitle display JT1 in the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2) depends on what kind of content it is. However, it may be unrelated to the game result,
It may be arranged such that the degree of expectation for awarding an advantageous game may differ depending on the content of the telop display. For example, when the content of the caption display JT2 is "The weather is getting cloudy!" (see Figure 87 (B)) and when it is "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!" (See Figure 88 (B)) In a certain case, it may be set so that it has no effect on the expectation of awarding an advantageous game in either case, or the expectation of awarding an advantageous game in the latter case than in the former case. It may be set to increase the degree of intensity. Furthermore, the contents of the telop display may be changed in response to the operation of a sub-button. Note that there are conversation effects and subtitle effects as effects in which the displayed content changes when sub-button operations are accepted, but it is relatively more likely that the display content will change in response to sub-button operations in conversation effects than in subtitle effects. The number is increasing. Further, in a pachinko machine, a conversation performance and a subtitle performance may be displayed during one change, and when configured in this way, the expectations of the conversation performance and the subtitle performance may not be related. For example, a conversation effect is displayed in red serifs, but a subtitle effect is displayed in blue letters. In particular, it is more suitable if a conversation effect is displayed before the reach effect and a subtitle effect is displayed after the reach effect, since the expected targets will be different. Further, it is also possible to consider a mode in which the level of expectation increases, such as the first subtitle effect display JD1 is in white text and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is in red text. Furthermore, although the second subtitle effect display JD2 is in red text, the third subtitle effect display may be in white text, which lowers the level of expectation. This aspect is suitable for use as a subtitle effect when the background image is in a manner to display failure. For example, when presenting whether or not to give advantageous benefits (in the case of slot machines, such as bonus winnings and AT winnings, and in the case of pachinko machines, presenting whether or not there will be a reach or not, or whether there will be a jackpot). ), when a subtitle effect (for example, the text "Let's go!") is displayed in red letters to increase expectations, the subsequent effect on whether or not to grant this advantageous benefit is incorrect. If the subtitles (for example, the words ``lost'') in scenes that indicate ``losing'' were to be displayed in red, it would be difficult to tell whether the player lost or was revived, so the word ``loser'' would be displayed in white. .

In addition, the characters displayed in the subtitle display may always have the same font (font and style), the same size (size), and the same color, or may vary depending on the gaming situation and the display timing of the subtitle display. The colors may be different. Further, depending on the font, size, color, etc., the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may vary. For example, in a subtitle display, either the outer line (outline) of the character or the area inside the outer line, or both, is displayed in blue, in addition to the normal color (black or white). A mode (also referred to as "blue caption display") and a mode in which the caption is displayed in red (also referred to as "red caption display") may be provided, and in that case, the red caption display is more advantageous than the blue caption display. It may be arranged so that the degree of expectation of giving a game increases.

As an example, in Figures 88 (A) and (B), for the text "Nice weather looks like a chance!" in the text display JT1, a blue text is displayed in which the area inside the outline of the text is blue, and in the text display JT2, the area inside the outline of the text is blue. For the phrase "Japan is perfectly sunny!!", an example of a red caption display in which the area inside the outline of the characters is red is shown. In this example, the size of the text displayed in the red caption is made larger than the size of the text displayed in the blue caption, and the font of the text displayed in the red caption is changed, and these differences also indicate that the red caption is more advantageous. This suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that the game will be awarded. In addition, if multiple subtitle effects are displayed during one game, the text in the subtitle display that is displayed first will have one type of size and font, and the subtitle effects that will be displayed from the second onwards will be displayed in one size and font. Regarding the characters displayed in the subtitle display, there may be a plurality of types of characters having different sizes and fonts. When displaying multiple subtitle effects with different expectations for giving an advantageous game during one game, such as a blue caption display and a red caption display, the one with the higher expectation level is displayed later. It may be displayed from

The color of characters, etc. (colors other than normal colors) in the telop display is not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue telop display and the red telop display, a green telop display with green text and a rainbow telop display with rainbow colors may be provided. Then, the degree of expectation for awarding an advantageous game may be increased in the order of blue telop display < green telop display < red telop display < rainbow telop display. At this time, in the case of the telop display with the highest expectation level (in this example, the rainbow telop display), it may be a guaranteed effect with the expectation level of 100% (for example, suggesting AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.). Note that in the case of a telop display that is displayed in a specific scene of a background image, characters and the like may not be displayed in a specific color. For example, when displaying a subtitle with content related to lyrics in a scene where a character sings on the background screen, a rainbow subtitle may not be displayed. In addition, the telop display (rainbow telop display) that is the final effect is set to be hidden when the player operates a predetermined switch, etc. after the start of the display. It will not be hidden due to the passage of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the confirmed performance disappearing due to the passage of time. Note that when the demo screen is displayed on the image display section DP, the rainbow telop display that has been displayed until then may be hidden. The telop display of other colors (for example, the blue telop display) may be hidden because a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display.

The telop display in the subtitle effect display is usually composed of words and sentences in characters whose meanings can be understood by the player. However, it may be composed of characters whose meanings cannot be understood, such as characters written in an ancient language, garbled characters, or characters containing figures or symbols (▽, ●, *), etc. When a subtitle display containing characters whose meaning cannot be understood is displayed, the expectation level for giving an advantageous game increases compared to when a subtitle display consisting of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. You can do it like this. In addition, character strings (sentences) in the caption display are basically displayed in one line without line breaks, but if they are displayed over two or more lines with line breaks (if they are composed of two or more sentences) ) may be provided.

The characters in the subtitle display in the subtitle display are often displayed in a bare state (not surrounded by a frame or the like), but they may also be displayed in a state surrounded by a frame or the like. As an example, FIG. 89(A) shows a mode in which the characters "The weather is getting cloudy!" in the telop display JT2 are displayed surrounded by a frame (referred to as a "background frame") JW1. The illustrated background frame JW1 has a rectangular outline, and an area inside the outline is decorated with a predetermined pattern. The form of the background frame (the shape of the outline and the color and pattern of the area inside the outline) is not limited to these forms, but can be any form (including a form without an outline). The form of the background frame may always be the same, or may vary depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Further, depending on the aspect of the background frame, the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game, etc. may vary. For example, in addition to the mode in which the area inside the outline of the background frame is displayed in normal color, the mode in which it is displayed in blue (this is also included in the blue caption display) and the mode in which it is displayed in red (this is also included in the red caption display). (included in the display) may be provided so that the expectation level for awarding an advantageous game is higher when the game is displayed in red than when it is displayed in blue.

If an error occurs while the subtitle effect display is being displayed on the image display section DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display section DP. In this case, the error notification display is rendered in a layer that is closer to the layer than the layer in which the subtitle effect display is rendered, but is displayed so as not to overlap with the subtitle effect display. As an example, in FIG. 89(B), the HP error notification display that notifies the occurrence of an HP error is placed within the screen area of the area where the subtitle production display JD2 is displayed in the image display section DP so as not to overlap the subtitle production display JD2. An example of what is displayed in the upper area is shown. In this way, when the subtitle effect display and error notification display are displayed on the image display section DP at the same time, the error notification display is displayed without overlapping with the subtitle effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) ) may overlap with the error notification display and at least a portion thereof may not be clearly visible), and the visibility of the contents of the caption display is ensured (it is also possible to provide a case where at least part of the caption display is hidden by the error notification display). possible). The types of errors when performing an error notification display are the same as those described in the explanation of the conversation performance. Note that depending on the type of error, the error may be notified on the entire screen (such as a PAM error or an error on the sub-control side), so in this case, the telop display may not be visible. In addition, even when the above-mentioned reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it does not overlap with the subtitle effect, so the visibility of the subtitle effect is ensured. (some parts may not be clearly visible). Since the reel rotation stop suggestion image is not an error, the moving image related to the subtitle performance continues to be executed. For this reason, if the text portion of the subtitle performance is not visible, it becomes difficult to understand the progress of the performance. With such a configuration, it is possible to alert the players and make them understand the content of the performance. In addition, even if a volume change image is displayed due to a volume change button being accepted during a game (while the reels are rotating in the case of a slot machine, while changing in the case of a pachinko machine), the text part of the subtitle effect will be visible. It is possible.

When the assist effect is displayed on the image display section DP, the subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display section DP. As an example, FIG. 90(A) shows a mode in which a subtitle effect display is displayed when a push navigation effect display (push order navigation effect display) is displayed on the image display portion DP. In the case of this example, when the push navigation effect display that informs the press order of "middle left/right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the screen of the image display section DP, the 1 subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed. The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation effect display in the lower area of the screen, which is the same position as the area where the push navigation effect display is displayed. At this time, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is drawn and displayed on a layer that is further back (rear side away from the player) than the layer in which the push navigation effect display is drawn. Therefore, while some of the characters in the telop display JT1 are hidden by the push navigation effect display and cannot be seen, the visibility of the push navigation effect display, which is of great interest to players, is ensured. In addition, the subtitle effect display may be displayed in a different area from the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) may not overlap with the push navigation effect display. (They may overlap, at least in part, and may not be clearly visible.) Further, when the push navigation effect display is displayed, the subtitle effect display may not be displayed. In particular, when displaying a subtitle display effect triggered by reception of the third stop operation, it is preferable to display the subtitle effect display after the push navigation effect display becomes hidden. By doing this, the player can concentrate on operating the stop switch while paying attention to the navigation content while the push navigation effect display is displayed, and only turn on the subtitles after the operation is completed and the push navigation effect display is hidden. It becomes possible to pay attention to the performance display. In addition to the mode that notifies the push order of "middle left", the push navigation effect display includes a mode that notifies the push order of "left middle right", a mode that notifies the push order of "right center left", etc. There are multiple types of aspects.

When the subtitle effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, the subtitle effect sound is output from the audio output section in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The subtitle effect audio is basically audio with the same content as the content of the subtitle display in the subtitle effect display. For example, when the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle display JD2 is "Perfect Japan is sunny!!", the corresponding subtitle display audio is "Kanpekin ni honbare desu". On the other hand, a case may be provided in which audio having a content different from the content of the telop display in the subtitle presentation display is output as the subtitle presentation audio. For example, as shown in FIG. 90(B), if the content of the caption display JT2 is garbled or meaningless content such as "▲/%*p・n↑→?a≫!", It is also possible to output subtitle production audio with another understandable content such as "Kanpekinani Honbare desu". If the content of the subtitle display in the subtitle production display and the content of the subtitle production audio differ, compared to the case where both contents match,
The degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game may be increased. Furthermore, if the telop display has meaningless content such as garbled characters, the level of expectation may be higher than when the telop display has content that can be understood. In addition, if the telop display has meaningless content such as garbled characters, the size, font, color, etc. of the characters of the telop display are displayed in a manner that is unlikely to provide an advantageous game. In this way, by displaying subtitles that are garbled but have low expectations, it becomes unclear whether expectations are high or low, and players who see it feel uncomfortable. can be done. In addition, it is possible to surprise a player who has the impression that the level of expectation for such a subtitle effect display is low due to the gap between the level of expectation and the actual level of expectation. Furthermore, a case may be provided in which when a sub-button is operated when a caption with meaningless content is displayed, the garbled characters are removed and the displayed content is changed to an understandable meaning. Furthermore, a typographical error effect such as a subtitle display with garbled characters may be included. For example, in a case where the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle display JD2 is "Perfect Japan is sunny!!", in a typographical error, the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle display JD2 is "It's perfect weather in Japan!!" and "perfect" is displayed as "wall". In this case as well, while the level of expectation is higher than that of a normal telop display, the font size, font, color, etc. of the telop display are displayed in a manner with a lower level of expectation to give an advantageous game, so that the actual expectation is lowered. It is possible to give surprises by the gap between the height and the degree.

As described above, the conversation effect display and the subtitle effect display are similar in that both include the display of characters related to what the character is saying. Examples of effects that display text include those that display the title text of a specific effect such as a continuous effect when it starts, or insert images that are unrelated to the previous flow into the background image. Some display characters in the production (cut-in production). However, these effect displays differ from conversation effect displays and subtitle effect displays in that the contents of the displayed characters are not directly related to what the characters say. Comparing the conversation effect display and the subtitle effect display, the conversation effect display has more types of aspects (such as the color and size of characters) that suggest a difference in the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game than the subtitle effect display. Furthermore, the conversation effect display is displayed in the upper area of the screen of the image display section DP rather than the subtitle effect display. As a general trend, the conversation effect display is relatively often displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the subtitle effect display is relatively often displayed when the third stop operation is accepted. For example, if there are a total of 80 types of conversation effect displays and a total of 70 types of subtitle effect displays, approximately 75% of the 80 types of conversation effect displays will be displayed when the start lever is operated, and 70 types of subtitle effects will be displayed. Approximately 80% of the subtitle effects displayed are triggered by reception of the third stop operation. Furthermore, the number of characters in the subtitle display is relatively greater than the number of characters in the dialogue display in the conversation production display. For example, if the average number of characters in each dialogue display of 80 types of dialogue production display is N, then the average value of the number of characters in each subtitle display of 70 types of subtitle production display is approximately 1.5 × N. be. Conversation effect display is relatively often displayed during normal play (normal gaming state) such as during non-AT, and subtitle effect display is relatively often displayed during continuous performance or during freeze. . For example, approximately 70% of the 80 types of conversation effects are displayed during normal times, and approximately 75% of the 70 types of subtitle effects are displayed during continuous effects or during freeze.

・Expectation level performance The expectation level performance is a performance that suggests to the player the level of expectation that will give an advantageous game. In the expectation performance, an expectation performance display for the expectation performance is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. The expectation performance display is, for example, a display whose display mode can be changed according to the expectation of giving an advantageous game, and is configured to include display objects (also referred to as "objects") having a predetermined form. As an example of the expectation level effect display, an expectation level effect display OD1 is shown in FIG.

The expectation effect display OD1 includes a heart-shaped object OJ1 displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP. The display mode of the object OJ1 differs depending on the degree of expectation of providing an advantageous game. Specifically, the color of the area inside the outline of object OJ1 changes depending on the expectation level. In this example, in addition to a mode in which the color of the area inside the outline of object OJ1 is a normal color (for example, white), a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue object display"), and a mode in which it is displayed in yellow. (also referred to as "yellow object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in green (also referred to as "green object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in red (also referred to as "red object display" ), a mode in which it is displayed in a specific pattern. There are two modes: a mode in which the object is displayed in rainbow colors (also referred to as "pattern object display"), and a mode in which the object is displayed in rainbow colors (also referred to as "rainbow object display"). The order of blue object display < yellow object display < green object display < red object display < pattern object display < rainbow object display is set so that the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game increases. In addition, in the case of the expectation performance display that has the highest expectation level (in this example, the rainbow object display), it is set as a guaranteed performance with 100% expectation level (for example, suggesting AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.). There is.

The timing at which the expectation effect display is displayed may be any timing triggered by the operation of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means such as a bet switch, start lever, or stop switch (display trigger). The display timing (display start timing) of the expectation effect display can be set as appropriate. For example, a predetermined timing after receiving the lever operation, a predetermined timing after receiving the first stop operation, a predetermined timing after receiving the second stop operation, or a predetermined timing after receiving the third stop operation. The predetermined timing can be set as the display timing of the expectation effect display. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the expectation effect display is displayed is, for example, the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the starting opening is won, the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from when the big winning opening is opened, Alternatively, the timing at which a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time of winning the big prize opening can be set as the display timing of the expectation effect display.

FIG. 91 illustrates a mode in which the expectation level effect display OD1 and the second subtitle effect display JD2 are simultaneously displayed on the image display section DP. In this way, the expectation level effect display and the subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display section DP at the same time, or may be displayed separately so that the display times do not overlap. Comparing the expectation level effect display and the subtitle effect display, the number of stages (for example, the number of colors) indicating the difference in expectation level is greater in the expectation level effect display than in the subtitle effect display. This is because the subtitle effect display also has the function of increasing the level of understanding of the progress of the game depending on the content of the subtitle display, so the expectation level effect display is mainly used to inform people of the difference in the level of expectation. This is because the number of stages that indicate differences in expectation levels may be smaller than in comparison with . In addition, the rainbow object display for the expectation level effect display and the rainbow caption display for the subtitle effect display both have in common that they represent confirmed effects, but in the case of other colors, the same color does not necessarily have the same expectation level. do not have. For example, when comparing a blue object display as an expectation effect display and a blue telop display as a subtitle effect display, the blue telop display is set to suggest a higher level of expectation than the blue object display. Note that the expectation level effect display and the telop display may be superimposed, and in that case, the telop display is displayed in the front (on the nearer layer). Further, when the expectation level effect display and the telop display overlap, it is difficult to understand if they have the same color, so they may be displayed while avoiding the same color.

In addition, as a general trend, differences in the color of the expectation effect display are related to differences in the internal lottery results (winning combinations) (for example, the red object display corresponds to the winning of a rare combination). ), and the difference in color between the subtitle effect display and the conversation effect display is often related to the degree of expectation of winning in a lottery other than the internal lottery, such as an AT win or a jackpot. The shape of the object in the subtitle effect display is not limited to the illustrated heart shape, but can be in various shapes. For example, a balloon-shaped object may be provided in addition to a heart-shaped object. Moreover, as another aspect, a chair-shaped object and a desk-shaped object may be provided, or a bottle-shaped object and a cup-shaped object may be provided. It should be noted that there are more types of telop displays in the subtitle effect display (types based on differences in the content of the telop) than there are types of objects in the expectation level effect display (types based on differences in shape). This is because, as described above, the subtitle effect display also has the function of increasing the level of understanding of the progress of the game, etc., depending on the content of the subtitle display. By increasing the number of types of subtitles displayed, various game situations can be explained. In the case of FIG. 91, there is no mode in which a specific pattern is used as the color of characters, etc. in the subtitle effect display, but such a mode may be provided. However, even if the characters of the telop are patterned, there is a risk that the player may not be able to visually recognize that the characters are small because of the small size of the characters. Therefore, when a pattern is used for characters or the like in the subtitle effect display, an expectation level effect display of the same pattern may be displayed on the image display section DP together with the subtitle effect display.

・ GET performance GET performance is, for example, in a notification game during AT (a game in which push navigation is executed), when a push order win such as a small bell win is established, game value (game medals) is awarded. This is a performance that shows the player the following. In the GET performance, a GET performance display for the GET performance is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. The GET performance display is a display for appealing to the player that a gaming value will be given. As an example of the GET effect display, GET effect display GD1 is shown in FIGS. 92(D) and 92(E).

The GET effect display GD1 is composed of a stroke of the characters "GET!" and is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP (in this example, the area is approximately in the center of the screen, but this can be changed as appropriate). When the GET effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, the GET effect sound is outputted from the audio output section in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The GET effect sound is a sound to appeal to the player that the game value is given, and for example, it is the sound ``Get'' which has the same content as the characters ``GET!'' in the GET effect display GD1 ( (The content may be different from the text content.)

The execution timing of the GET effect (GET effect display GD1 and GET effect sound) will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. As shown in FIG. 92(A), when the push navigation effect display ND1 notifying the pressing order of "center left and right" is displayed on the image display section DP, the first stop operation is accepted according to the push navigation effect display ND1. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the push navigation effect display ND1 changes to a mode that notifies the pressing order of "left and right" and is displayed on the image display section DP. Here, when the second stop operation is accepted according to the push navigation effect display ND1, as shown in FIG. displayed on the department DP. Furthermore, when the third stop operation is accepted (the operation part of the stop switch that accepted the third stop operation (in this example, the right stop switch) is pressed, and the stop switch is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, ) The push navigation effect display ND1 is hidden.

After the push navigation effect display ND1 is hidden, the provision of game value (payout of game medals by the hopper and addition of the number of credits) and the GET effect are executed. Specifically, when the third stop operation is canceled (the press of the operation part of the stop switch that received the third stop operation is released, and the stop switch is switched from the on state to the off state), the game Addition of value, output of GET effect sound, and display of GET effect display are started. In FIG. 93, these start timings are substantially the same, but the start timings may be shifted slightly. The GET effect sound that has started to be output ends at a time point before the time point at which the provision of game value ends. After the output of the GET performance sound ends, the provision of gaming value ends, and the GET performance display is hidden at a time later than the time when the provision of gaming value ends. In this way, by making the display end timing of the GET effect display later than the output end timing of the GET effect sound and the end timing of the game value provision, the player is given the game value by listening to the GET effect sound. In addition to being able to pay attention to the GET effect and seeing the GET effect display after listening to the GET effect audio and after the game value has been awarded, you can reconfirm that the game value has been awarded, and feel a sense of elation. It becomes possible to obtain.

In a game in which a GET effect is performed, a subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display section DP in response to reception of the third stop operation. In FIG. 92(E), a second subtitle effect display JD2 (telop) is displayed in a lower area of the screen than the area where the GET effect display GD1 is displayed in the image display section DP without overlapping with the GET effect display GD1. An example in which display JT2) is displayed is shown. The subtitle effect display that is displayed upon reception of the third stop operation must be displayed at the time when the GET effect display becomes hidden, that is, the subtitle effect is displayed at a time before the time when the GET effect display becomes hidden. Preferably, the display of the display is started. By doing so, the player's attention can be immediately directed to the subtitle effect display at the time when the GET effect display becomes hidden. In addition, in the example of FIG. 93, the display start timing of the subtitle effect display is set to be located between the end time of the game value provision and the time point when the GET effect display is hidden, but the timing is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, at any timing within the period from when the third stop operation is received until the GET effect display is hidden (also referred to as the "subtitle effect display start suitable period"), or before the third stop operation is received. The subtitle effect display may be started at a predetermined timing. As mentioned above, all the push navigation effect displays disappear when the third stop operation is accepted, the GET effect display is not yet displayed when the third stop operation is accepted, and the subtitle effect display is not displayed when the third stop operation is accepted. The display starts at a point before or after the start of displaying the GET effect display. The subtitle effect display that started displaying when the third stop operation was accepted or at a point before that will continue to be displayed even after the third stop operation is accepted, but the push navigation effect display will be triggered by the third stop operation being accepted. disappears, so the subtitle effect display can be clearly seen without being hidden behind the push navigation effect display. Additionally, the GET effect display is displayed when the third stop operation is released, but this GET effect display is originally displayed in a position that does not overlap with the subtitle effect display, and disappears over time, so the subtitle effect display is displayed after the GET effect is displayed. It is also easier to see. Therefore, even if a push navigation effect display is displayed or a blessing effect display (including a GET effect display) to improve the player's satisfaction level, the player cannot understand the content of the caption display of the subtitle effect display. It becomes possible to understand the

- Scene switching effect A scene switching effect is a display effect consisting of multiple scenes that may be switched in response to the start lever being operated or the stop switch being operated (for example, a Is displayed). Each scene is composed of a progress effect in which the display content changes as time passes, and a cyclic effect that becomes displayable after the progress effect ends and in which the same display content is repeated. Progress effects are mainly composed of moving images, and circulating images are composed of moving images or still images. The scene switching performance may be configured as a single performance or as a continuous performance. As examples of scene switching effects, a first scene switching effect is shown in FIG. 94(A), and a second scene switching effect is shown in FIG. 94(B).

The first scene switching effect is composed of four scenes from the first scene to the fourth scene, as shown in FIG. 94(A). The first scene consists of a progression effect P1 and a circulation effect L1, the second scene consists of a progression effect P2 and a circulation effect L2, the third scene consists of a progress effect P3 and a circulation effect L3, and the fourth scene consists of a progress effect P3 and a circulation effect L3. The scene is composed of a progress effect P4 and a circulation effect L4. In the first scene switching effect, display of the first scene progress effect P1 is started in response to reception of the operation of the start lever. If a predetermined time (time T1) passes without the first stop operation being accepted after the display of the progress effect P1 starts, the display of the progress effect P1 ends and the display of the circulation effect L1 starts. This circulation effect L1 is continuously displayed until the first stop operation is accepted.

Thereafter, when the first stop operation is effectively accepted, the first scene is switched from the second scene to the second scene, and the progress effect P2 of the second scene is started to be displayed. Note that if the first stop operation is effectively accepted before time T1 has elapsed after the first scene progress effect P1 has started displaying, the cycle effect L1 will not be displayed and the first scene to first scene will be displayed. The display switches to two scenes, and the progress effect P2 of the second scene starts to be displayed. If a predetermined time (time T2) elapses without the second stop operation being accepted after the display of the progress effect P2 starts, the display of the progress effect P2 ends and the display of the circulation effect L2 is started. This circulation effect L2 is continuously displayed until the second stop operation is accepted.

Thereafter, when the second stop operation is effectively accepted, the second scene is switched from the second scene to the third scene, and the progress effect P3 of the third scene is started to be displayed. Note that if the second stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T2 has elapsed after the progress effect P2 of the second scene has started to be displayed, the cycle effect L2 will not be displayed and the second scene to The display switches to 3 scenes, and the display of the progress effect P3 of the 3rd scene starts. If a predetermined time (time T3) elapses without the third stop operation being accepted after the display of the progress effect P3 starts, the display of the progress effect P3 ends and the display of the circulation effect L3 starts. This circulation effect L3 is continuously displayed until the third stop operation is accepted.

Thereafter, when the third stop operation is effectively accepted, the third scene is switched to the fourth scene, and the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene is started to be displayed. In addition, if the third stop operation is effectively accepted before time T3 has elapsed after the progress effect P3 of the third scene has started to be displayed, the cycle effect L3 will not be displayed and the process will continue from the third scene to the third scene. The display switches to 4 scenes, and the progress effect P4 of the 4th scene starts to be displayed. If a predetermined time (time T4) elapses without any bet operation, lever operation, settlement operation, etc. (collectively referred to as "next game operation") for the next game being accepted after the display of the progress effect P4 starts, the time elapsed The display of the progress effect P4 ends and the display of the circulation effect L4 starts. This cyclic effect L4 is continuously displayed until the next game operation is accepted (it may be ended after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the display).

In the first scene switching performance, the possible display continuation time (time T2) of the second scene progress performance P2, which changes when the first stop operation is accepted, and the display continuation of the third scene progress performance P3, which changes when the second stop operation is accepted. Comparing the possible time (time T3) and the possible display continuation time (time T4) of the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene, which is switched by accepting the third stop operation, time T4 is relatively longer than times T2 and T3. It has been set for a long time. This is because after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the contents of the progress effect because the player concentrates on performing the next stop operation, whereas the third stop operation This is done in consideration of the fact that after the operation, the player has completed the stop operation, so the player can feel at ease and can easily pay attention to the contents of the progress performance. In other words, by setting a relatively long time for the progress presentation after the third stop operation, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the content of the progress presentation after the third stop operation, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Become. Further, by making the time for the progress performance after the third stop operation relatively long, it becomes easier to suggest the game result etc. in the progress performance after the third stop. This tendency is not limited to a specific scene switching effect, but extends to all types of scene switching effects. For example, if there are a total of 50 types of scene switching effects that are executed during a continuous production, and a total of 10 types of scene switching effects that are executed during a single performance, the overall effect of these 60 types of scene switching effects is As a tendency (average value), time T4 is set relatively longer than times T2 and T3.

In addition, in the first scene switching performance, the first scene can be switched from the first scene to the second scene regardless of which stop switch among the three stop switches on the left center right receives the first stop operation. . Similarly, no matter which stop switch accepts the second stop operation, the scene is switched from the second scene to the third scene, and no matter which stop switch accepts the third stop operation, the scene is switched from the third scene to the third scene. Switch to the 4th scene. By doing so, the control processing in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, each time each stop operation is accepted, first, second, and third stop acceptance commands are sent from the main control means to the sub control means, and the sub control means receives the first, second, and third stop commands based on these commands. You can know that the operation has been accepted. The first, second, and third stop acceptance commands also include information about which stop switch was operated. However, in the first scene switching performance, the scene can be switched without referring to that information as long as the number of stop acceptance commands in one game is known. Therefore, it is possible to omit referring to information regarding which stop switch has been operated, and thereby it is possible to simplify the processing for scene switching. In addition, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches while playing the game, scenes can be switched at the appropriate timing, so the game progress and the content of the performance are more closely aligned. It becomes easier to ensure consistency. In addition, if the sub-control means knows that it is a stop reception command, it can determine the number of stop reception commands based on the number of stop commands received. There is no particular need for information indicating whether the Therefore, as information included in each stop command, it is possible to omit the information indicating the number of stop operation receptions.In this case, it is possible to reduce the amount of information in the stop reception command, and the memory is also saved. It is also possible to reduce storage capacity.

The second scene switching effect is composed of two scenes, a first scene to a second scene, as shown in FIG. 94(B). The first scene consists of a progress effect P11 and a circulation effect L11, and the second scene consists of a progress effect P12 and a circulation effect L12. In the second scene switching performance, the display of the first scene progress performance P11 is started in response to reception of the operation of the start lever. If a predetermined time (time T11) passes after the start of the display of the progress effect P11 until the third stop operation is accepted, the display of the progress effect P11 ends and the display of the cyclic effect L11 starts at the elapsed time point. . This circulation effect L11 is continuously displayed until the third stop operation is accepted. Further, in the second scene switching performance, even if the first stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation is accepted, the scene will not be switched based on this.

After the display of the circulation effect L11 starts, when the third stop operation is effectively accepted after receiving the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the reception is used as a trigger to switch from the first scene to the second scene, and The scene progress effect P12 starts to be displayed. Note that if the third stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T11 has elapsed after the first scene progress effect P11 has started displaying, the cycle effect L11 will not be displayed and the process will continue from the first scene to the first scene. The display changes to two scenes, and the progress effect P12 of the second scene starts to be displayed. When a predetermined time (time T12) elapses without the next game operation being accepted after the display of the progress effect P12 starts, the display of the progress effect P12 ends and the display of the circulation effect L12 starts. This cyclic effect L12 is continuously displayed until the next game operation is accepted (it may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the display).

In the second scene switching performance, it is possible to switch from the first scene to the second scene regardless of which stop switch among the three stop switches on the left center right receives the first stop operation. do not have. Similarly, no matter which stop switch receives the second stop operation, the first scene will not be switched to the second scene. On the other hand, if the third stop operation is accepted, the first scene is switched to the second scene regardless of which stop switch receives the third stop operation. For example, when the middle stop switch receives the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the scene cannot be switched to the second scene, but when the middle stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene can be switched to the second scene. Further, when the middle stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene is switched to the second scene, and when the left stop switch or the right stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene is switched to the second scene. By doing so, the control processing in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, it is omitted to refer to the information about which stop switch was operated, which is included in the first, second, and third stop acceptance commands that are sent from the main control means to the sub-control means each time each stop operation is accepted. Since the scene can be switched while the scene is being changed, the process for switching the scene can be simplified. In addition, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches while playing the game, scenes can be switched at the appropriate timing, so the game progress and the content of the performance are more closely aligned. It becomes easier to ensure consistency.

As described above, in the second scene switching performance, whether the first stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation is accepted, the scene will not be switched based on this. In this embodiment, there are other scene switching effects other than the first or second scene switching effects, but as a general trend, in the scene switching effects, the scene is switched when the third stop operation is accepted. When comparing the case where the scene changes when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted, the case where the scene changes when the third stop operation is accepted is better than the case where the scene changes when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted. The rate of scene switching is relatively higher than the case where the scene switches due to reception (the former case can be set to 0%, and the latter case can be set to 100%). This is because after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the contents of the progress effect because the player concentrates on performing the next stop operation, whereas the third stop operation This is done in consideration of the fact that after the operation, the player has completed the stop operation, so the player can feel at ease and can easily pay attention to the contents of the progress performance. That is, by setting a relatively high rate of scene switching triggered by the third stop operation, the player's interest in the content of the progress performance after the third stop operation is increased, and the interest in the game is improved. becomes possible. In addition, by setting a relatively high rate of scene switching triggered by the third stop operation, it becomes easier to suggest the game result in the progress performance after the third stop.

- Darkening effect A darkening effect is a display effect that makes it appear that the visibility of the display is reduced. The darkening effect is executed, for example, when a predetermined effect display suggests a game result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, not winning an AT, not winning a bonus, not winning an AT add-on, not winning a jackpot with a pachinko machine, etc.) . Further, although the blackout effect is often executed when the final scene of a continuous effect is displayed, it can also be executed in a single effect. An example of a darkening effect is shown in FIG.

FIG. 95(A) shows the display state of the image display section DP immediately before the darkening effect is executed. In this example, the image display section DP includes a final scene display RD1 showing the final scene of the continuous performance, a subtitle performance display JD3 having a subtitle display JT3 with the content "Is there a storm tomorrow?", and the number of remaining games in AT ( A first region RY1 indicating "23G remaining") and a second region RY2 indicating the name of the game state ("Decisive Battle Stage") are displayed. The continuous performance is, for example, displaying a moving image in which the character CH1 challenges something over a plurality of games. Furthermore, the final scene display RD1 depicts the character CH1 who has failed in the challenge hanging his head, which suggests that a disadvantageous game result has been obtained for the player. Furthermore, although the audio is output at the start of the final scene display RD1, the output of the audio may be terminated when performing a darkening effect for the final scene display RD1. In such a configuration, the absence of sound can clearly indicate to the player that the game is over. It goes without saying that when an error occurs in this state, an error sound is output.

FIG. 95(B) shows the display state of the image display section DP when the darkening effect is executed. In the blackout effect of this example, the final scene display RD1 is displayed so as to become dark as a whole and to reduce visibility. Furthermore, the visibility of the subtitle effect display JD3 is also reduced. On the other hand, in the first region RY1 and the second region RY2, the original brightness is maintained and visibility has not deteriorated. By doing this, it is possible to give the impression to the player that a game result that is disadvantageous to the player has been obtained, while ensuring the visibility of information related to subsequent games, so that the contents can be communicated to the player. It becomes possible to notify clearly. The area (also referred to as a "non-dark area") in which the visibility is not reduced even during a dark change effect in the image display section DP is not limited to the first area RY1 and the second area RY2. In the case of a slot machine, the area that displays the number of credits, the area that displays the number of bets, the area that displays the number of games played, the area that displays the number of acquired gaming values, the area that displays sub effects such as mini games, etc. In the case of a pachinko machine, it can be a blackout area, and in the case of a pachinko machine, an area where the hold display is displayed, an area where a fluctuating pattern (so-called mini pattern) different from the decorative pattern is displayed, an area where the number of holds is displayed, and the area where the floating hold is displayed. It is possible to make the area showing the icon or the like a non-darkening area. Furthermore, the mini symbol is also referred to as the second symbol, and is a symbol that is always displayed even if the first symbol disappears due to a reach effect, etc., and it represents the progress of the game. This symbol allows the player to always understand the progress of the game.

Furthermore, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any next game operation after the blackout effect has been executed, the visibility of the final scene display RD1 may be further reduced (for example, made darker). good. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to distinguish between a blackout as a result of continuous performance and a blackout due to no progress in the game so as not to misunderstand them. Note that instead of reducing the visibility in two stages, the visibility may be reduced gradually over time.

A layered structure may be used to reduce the visibility of the display in a blackout effect. For example, the first layer that depicts the final scene display RD1 is placed on the back side, the second layer that depicts the subtitle display JD3 is placed on the near side, and the first layer RY1 is placed further on the near side. and a third layer that depicts the second region RY2 (a layer that depicts the first region RY and a layer that depicts the second region RY2 may be separated) are arranged. Then, at the time of blackout effect, a fourth layer is placed between the second layer and the third layer, and by processing to reduce the brightness of the entire area of the fourth layer, the final scene display RD1 and subtitle effect display JD3 are The visibility of the first region RY1 and the second region RY2 can be maintained while reducing the visibility.

Instead of reducing the brightness of the fourth layer, it is possible to reduce visibility by increasing the opacity of the fourth layer or by drawing many thin lines or fine patterns on the fourth layer. good. Instead of using layers, visibility may be reduced by applying blurring processing such as mosaic to the image of the final scene display RD1. Furthermore, visibility may be reduced by lowering the brightness of the backlight of the image display section DP. In this case, power consumption can be reduced by lowering the brightness of the backlight. Further, in the example of FIG. 95(B), the subtitle effect display JD3 with reduced visibility is displayed as is, but it may be hidden during the dark effect.

If a player obtains an advantageous gaming result during a continuous performance (for example, an AT win, a bonus win, an AT additional win, a jackpot on a pachinko machine, etc.), the player will receive an advantageous gaming result in the final scene of the continuous performance. In many cases, a display (also referred to as a "success display") indicating that the result has been obtained is displayed, and in that case, no blackout effect is performed. On the other hand, even though an advantageous game result has been obtained, a display suggesting that an unfavorable game result has been obtained (also referred to as a "failure display") is temporarily displayed, and then a display indicating that an unfavorable game result has been obtained is displayed. A display (also called a "resurrection display") may be made to suggest that the item has been obtained. In this case, a darkening effect may be performed while the failure display is being displayed. If a blackout effect is executed while a failure display is being displayed, and then a recovery display is to be displayed, the blackout effect is ended before the recovery display is displayed. By doing this, the resurrection display can be displayed while ensuring visibility, making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that an advantageous game result has been obtained.

Furthermore, an advantageous game result is given when a failure display, a blackout effect, and a resurrection display occur (even if there is no blackout effect), and an advantageous game result is given when a success display is performed without a resurrection display. Comparatively, when there is a resurrection display, the game results are more advantageous (for example, winning in a specialized zone where AT additions are likely to occur, AT winnings with a large number of initial games, jackpots with a large number of rounds on pachinko machines, etc.) , a probability fluctuation jackpot in which the jackpot probability is high) may be relatively more likely to occur. By doing this, even if a failure display or a blackout effect is performed, it is possible to keep the player's expectations without being disappointed.

When visibility is reduced due to a blackout effect, for example, a sub-button may be operated and an adjustment screen for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the screen or the volume of the speaker may be displayed. In that case, the visibility of the light amount and volume adjustment screen is ensured even during the dark transition effect. Further, when some kind of error occurs during execution of the blackout effect, an error notification display may be performed to notify the occurrence of the error. In this case, the visibility of the error notification display is ensured even during the blackout effect. Note that the blackout effect can also be executed in situations other than continuous effects. For example, the blackout effect may be performed in response to a stop operation of the stop switch being performed in a different press order from the press order notified by the push navigation effect (also referred to as "push order failure"). In this case, even if the first stop operation fails in the push order or the second stop operation fails in the push order, it is possible to perform a darkening effect at the time of the push order failure. At this time, it is possible to set a non-dark area where visibility does not deteriorate, as in the case of a dark change effect in a continuous effect.

Although the embodiments according to the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and can be modified as appropriate. For example, in the correction counter of the first embodiment, a first threshold value and a second threshold value (first threshold value < second threshold value) are set, and if the correction counter value exceeds the first threshold value but exceeds the second threshold value, It is easier to start the next AT when one AT ends with the correction counter value exceeding the second threshold than when one AT ends without exceeding the second threshold. It may be set so that the probability that the number of games played before the game is completed is high. As a result, it is possible to create a wave in the change in the number of game medals (number of game medals acquired) within the range of 2,400 coins, which is the upper limit at the end of one advantageous section, and to suppress excessive acquisition of game medals. becomes possible.

In the first embodiment described above, the transition (switching) of images in the ending effect follows the flow (branching) of a specific image transition pattern that corresponds to a change in a predetermined variable (for example, the number of game medals acquired). It is about to be done. In contrast, there are multiple image transition patterns, such as an image transition pattern that corresponds to a change in one variable (for example, the number of games played in an advantageous period) and an image transition pattern that corresponds to a change in another variable (for example, the number of game medals acquired). A plurality of image transition patterns corresponding to changes in each of the variables may be prepared in advance, and the branching manner of the executed image transition pattern may vary greatly depending on the change in each variable. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the image transition patterns in the ending effect.

In the first embodiment described above, a predetermined symbol combination (
``Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven,'' etc.) are notified to the players so that they can match them. On the other hand, for example, by displaying a predetermined display on a display controlled by the main control means, such as a main push order display (payout number display lamp 46j), it is possible to make the player match a predetermined symbol combination. You may notify. As a result, even if the sub-control means is unable to perform a suggestive performance due to a malfunction such as a malfunction, it is possible to ensure that the player has an opportunity to arrange a predetermined symbol combination, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. It becomes possible to perform the following.

The types of characters displayed in the demo performance (a performance that is displayed during non-game play and executed after a predetermined period of time after the end of the game; also referred to as "standby performance") and the types of characters displayed in the conversation performance are as follows: The configuration may be such that there are more conversation performances. Characters that appear less frequently (so-called premium characters) may not be displayed in the demo performance, but may appear in conversation performances or other performances. As a result, a situation may occur in which a character you do not know in advance (a character you know exists but do not know will appear) appears, and the appearance of such a character can effectively raise expectations. can be increased to Furthermore, the demonstration performance is configured so that conversation performance and subtitle performance are not displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, a slot machine (recurring drum type gaming machine) that uses game medals as gaming value has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, a drum-type game machine that uses game balls as a game value, a drum-type game machine that uses information recorded on an electronic recording medium as a game value, a mahjong ball game machine, an arranged ball machine, The same effect can be obtained by applying the same method to pachinko machines and the like. Further, the present invention can be similarly applied to slot machines having four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

1 Slot machine 2 Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reel 25 Start lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop switch (first embodiment)
60 Main control board 70 Sub control board 70A Sub main control board 70B Sub sub control board 100 Main control means 200 Sub control means 200A Sub main control means 200B Sub sub control means 500 Stop switch unit 510, 520, 530 Stop switch (second embodiment) )
512,522,532 Stop switch cover 514,524,534 Stop switch lamp 540 Stop switch panel 600 AT notification display 611,612,613 7 segment display W Display window DA1, DA2 Design display area GK1, GK2, GK3 Display pattern DP image display section

Claims (1)

It has a plurality of performances composed of a plurality of scenes (hereinafter, a collection of "productions composed of a plurality of scenes" is referred to as a "predetermined production group"),
Certain objects can be displayed in a predetermined color,
Certain objects can be displayed in certain colors,
It has a specific effect that suggests that the degree of expectation for awarding benefits differs depending on whether a specific object is displayed in a predetermined color or a specific object is displayed in a specific color,
A character string related to a character's dialogue displayed in a certain display area in accordance with a moving image (hereinafter, a ``character string related to a character's dialogue displayed in a certain display area in accordance with a moving image'' is referred to as a ``dialogue character'') ) has multiple effects that can be displayed,
When the color of a specific object indicates the expectation level of awarding a benefit, the number of colors corresponding to the level of expectation of awarding a specific object is the number of colors corresponding to the level of expectation of awarding a benefit based on the color of the dialogue character. The number of colors is larger than that corresponding to the level of expectation,
Comparing the case where a specific object is displayed in a predetermined color among the specific effects and the case where the dialogue characters are displayed in a predetermined color among the plurality of effects, it is found that among the plurality of effects, the dialogue characters are displayed in a predetermined color. The system is designed so that the expectation of receiving benefits is higher when the reward is displayed in a predetermined color.
The predetermined production group includes a predetermined production,
The prescribed performance is a performance that continues over multiple games,
The scenes displayed corresponding to each performance belonging to a predetermined performance group are configured such that they may be switched based on the n-th (n is a numerical value) stop operation, regardless of the type of reel that is stopped.
The predetermined performance includes at least a first scene displayed based on the first stop operation in a certain game, and a second scene displayed based on the last stop operation in a certain game,
The first scene displayed based on the first stop operation in a certain game is configured so that the next scene will not be displayed unless another stop operation is performed,
The second scene displayed based on the last stop operation in a certain game is configured so that the next scene will not be displayed unless a start switch operation related to the start of the next game is performed,
Among all performances belonging to a predetermined performance group, the proportion of performances in which the scene changes based on the last stop operation is higher than that in which the scene changes based on the first stop operation among all performances belonging to the predetermined performance group. A gaming machine configured so that the ratio of presentations that have an effect is higher than that of an effect that has an effect.

Images